• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Tantra
  • Tantra Collection
  • Action tantras
  • Toh 556

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh556.pdf

གསེར་འོད་དམ་པའི་མདོ།

The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (2)
Glossary

Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra
འཕགས་པ་གསེར་འོད་དམ་པ་མདོ་སྡེའི་དབང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ་ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོའི་མདོ།
’phags pa gser ’od dam pa mdo sde’i dbang po’i rgyal po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo
The Noble Mahāyāna Sūtra “The Lord King of Sūtras, The Sublime Golden Light”
Āryasuvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtrendra­rāja­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra

Toh 556

Degé Kangyur, vol. 89 (rgyud ’bum, pa), folios 151.b–273.a

Imprint

84000 logo

First published 2024

Current version v 1.0.8 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 3.35pm on Tuesday, 28th January 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh556.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· Tantric Rituals
· The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light in India
· The Sūtra outside India
· The Sūtra in Tibet
· Comparing the Versions
· Translations into Western Languages
· Detailed Summary of The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light
+ 29 sections- 29 sections
· Chapter 1: The Introduction
· Chapter 2: The Teaching of the Lifespan of the Tathāgata
· Chapter 3: The Differentiation of the Three Bodies
· Chapter 4: The Confession in a Dream
· Chapter 5: The End of the Continuum of Creating Karma
· Chapter 6: The Purification of the Bhūmis
· Chapter 7: A Praise of All the Realms of the Past, Future, and Present Samyaksaṃbuddhas
· Chapter 8: The Dhāraṇī Called Golden
· Chapter 9: Emptiness
· Chapter 10: Fulfilling Wishes on the Basis of Emptiness
· Chapter 11: The Four Mahārājas Look Upon Devas and Humans
· Chapter 12: The Four Mahārājas Protecting the Land
· Chapter 13: The Dhāraṇī of Nonattachment
· Chapter 14: The Wish-Fulfilling Jewel Dhāraṇī
· Chapter 15: The Goddess Sarasvatī
· Chapter 16: The Great Goddess Śrī
· Chapter 17: The Increase of Wealth by the Great Goddess Śrī
· Chapter 18: Dṛḍhā, the Goddess of the Earth
· Chapter 19: Saṃjñeya, the Lord of Yakṣas
· Chapter 20: The King’s Treatise: The Commitment of the Lord of Devas
· Chapter 21: Susaṃbhava
· Chapter 22: The Protection Given by Yakṣas
· Chapter 23: The Prophecy to Ten Thousand Devas
· Chapter 24: Ending All Illness
· Chapter 25: The Story of the Fish Guided by Jalavāhana
· Chapter 26: The Gift of the Body to a Tigress
· Chapter 27: Praise by All Bodhisattvas
· Chapter 28: Praise of All Tathāgatas
· Chapter 29: The Conclusion
tr. The Translation
+ 29 chapters- 29 chapters
1. Chapter 1: The Introduction
2. Chapter 2: The Teaching of the Lifespan of the Tathāgata
3. Chapter 3: The Differentiation of the Three Bodies
4. Chapter 4: The Confession in a Dream
5. Chapter 5: The End of the Continuum of Creating Karma
6. Chapter 6: The Purification of the Bhūmis
7. Chapter 7: A Praise of All the Realms of the Past, Future, and Present Samyaksaṃbuddhas
8. Chapter 8: The Dhāraṇī Called Golden
9. Chapter 9: Emptiness
10. Chapter 10: Fulfilling Wishes on the Basis of Emptiness
11. Chapter 11: The Four Mahārājas Look Upon Devas and Humans
12. Chapter 12: The Four Mahārājas Protecting the Land
13. Chapter 13: The Dhāraṇī of Nonattachment
14. Chapter 14: The Wish-fulfilling Jewel Dhāraṇī
15. Chapter 15: The Goddess Sarasvatī
16. Chapter 16: The Great Goddess Śrī
17. Chapter 17: The Increase of Wealth by the Great Goddess Śrī
18. Chapter 18: Dṛḍhā, the Goddess of the Earth
19. Chapter 19: Saṃjñeya, the Lord of Yakṣas
20. Chapter 20: The King’s Treatise: The Commitment of the Lord of Devas
21. Chapter 21: Susaṃbhava
22. Chapter 22: The Protection Given by Yakṣas
23. Chapter 23: The Prophecy to Ten Thousand Devas
24. Chapter 24: Ending All Illness
25. Chapter 25: The Story of the Fish Guided by Jalavāhana
26. Chapter 26: The Gift of the Body to a Tigress
27. Chapter 27: Praise by All Bodhisattvas
28. Chapter 28: The Praise of All Tathāgatas
29. Chapter 29: The Conclusion
c. Colophon
ab. Abbreviations
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· Primary Sources in Tibetan and Chinese
+ 1 section- 1 section
· Secondary References‍—Kangyur
+ 1 section- 1 section
· Secondary References‍—Tengyur
+ 1 section- 1 section
· Other References in Tibetan
· Other References in English and Other Languages
· Translations
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light has held great importance in Buddhism for its instructions on the purification of karma. In particular, much of the sūtra is specifically addressed to monarchs and thus has been significant for rulers‍—not only in India but also in China, Japan, Mongolia, and elsewhere‍—who wished to ensure the well-being of their nations through such purification. Reciting and internalizing this sūtra is understood to be efficacious for personal purification and also for the welfare of a state and the world.

s.­2

In this sūtra, the bodhisattva Ruciraketu has a dream in which a prayer of confession emanates from a shining golden drum. He relates the prayer to the Buddha, and a number of deities then vow to protect it and its adherents. The ruler’s devotion to the sūtra is emphasized as important if the nation is to benefit. Toward the end of the sūtra are two well-known narratives of the Buddha’s previous lives: the account of the physician Jalavāhana, who saves and blesses numerous fish, and that of Prince Mahāsattva, who gives his body to a hungry tigress and her cubs.

s.­3

This is the second-longest version of The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light preserved in the Kangyur. It comprises twenty-nine chapters and was translated into Tibetan primarily from Sanskrit.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This text was translated by Peter Alan Roberts, who translated the text from Tibetan into English and wrote the introduction. Ling Lung Chen and Wang Chipan were consultants for the Chinese versions of the sūtra. Emily Bower was the project manager and editor. Tracy Davis was the initial copyeditor. Thanks to Michael Radich for sharing his research on the sūtra.

ac.­2

The translation was completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. Rory Lindsay edited the translation and the introduction, and Xiaolong Diao, Ting Lee Ling, and H. S. Sum Cheuk Shing checked the translation against the Chinese sources. Ven. Konchog Norbu copyedited the text, and Sameer Dhingra was in charge of the digital publication process.

ac.­3

The translation of this text has been made possible through the generous sponsorship of E E, May-E, Minda, and Chung-Da Ho.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light has held great importance in Buddhism for its instructions on the purification of karma. In particular, much of the sūtra is specifically addressed to monarchs, and thus it has been significant for rulers‍—not only in India but also in China, Japan, Mongolia, and elsewhere‍—who wished to ensure the well-being of their nations. It is understood to be efficacious for personal purification and beneficial for the welfare of a state and of the world.

Tantric Rituals

The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light in India

The Sūtra outside India

The Sūtra in Tibet

Comparing the Versions

Translations into Western Languages

Detailed Summary of The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light

Chapter 1: The Introduction

Chapter 2: The Teaching of the Lifespan of the Tathāgata

Chapter 3: The Differentiation of the Three Bodies

Chapter 4: The Confession in a Dream

Chapter 5: The End of the Continuum of Creating Karma

Chapter 6: The Purification of the Bhūmis

Chapter 7: A Praise of All the Realms of the Past, Future, and Present Samyaksaṃbuddhas

Chapter 8: The Dhāraṇī Called Golden

Chapter 9: Emptiness

Chapter 10: Fulfilling Wishes on the Basis of Emptiness

Chapter 11: The Four Mahārājas Look Upon Devas and Humans

Chapter 12: The Four Mahārājas Protecting the Land

Chapter 13: The Dhāraṇī of Nonattachment

Chapter 14: The Wish-Fulfilling Jewel Dhāraṇī

Chapter 15: The Goddess Sarasvatī

Chapter 16: The Great Goddess Śrī

Chapter 17: The Increase of Wealth by the Great Goddess Śrī

Chapter 18: Dṛḍhā, the Goddess of the Earth

Chapter 19: Saṃjñeya, the Lord of Yakṣas

Chapter 20: The King’s Treatise: The Commitment of the Lord of Devas

Chapter 21: Susaṃbhava

Chapter 22: The Protection Given by Yakṣas

Chapter 23: The Prophecy to Ten Thousand Devas

Chapter 24: Ending All Illness

Chapter 25: The Story of the Fish Guided by Jalavāhana

Chapter 26: The Gift of the Body to a Tigress

Chapter 27: Praise by All Bodhisattvas

Chapter 28: Praise of All Tathāgatas

Chapter 29: The Conclusion


Text Body

The Translation
The Noble Mahāyāna Sūtra
The Lord King of Sūtras, The Sublime Golden Light

1.

Chapter 1: The Introduction

[B1] [F.151.b]


1.­1

I pay homage to all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śrāvakas of the past, future, and present.


Thus did I hear at one time.22 The Bhagavat was within the profound, completely pure Dharma realm that is the sublime field of activity of the tathāgatas, dwelling at Vulture Peak Mountain at Rājagṛha, together with a saṅgha of ninety-eight thousand23 great bhikṣus. All of them were great arhats, perfectly tamed like the king of elephants. Their defilements had ceased, they were devoid of kleśas, their minds were completely liberated, their wisdom was completely liberated, they had done what had to be done, they had put down their burdens, they had attained their goals, they had cut through engagement with existence, they had attained supreme and sublime power, they had perfectly maintained pure conduct, they were arrayed with methods and wisdom, they had manifested the eight liberations, and they had reached the farther shore.


2.

Chapter 2: The Teaching of the Lifespan of the Tathāgata

2.­1

Also, at that time, there dwelled in the great city of Rājagṛha a bodhisattva mahāsattva by the name of Ruciraketu. He had served past jinas, had developed roots of merit, and had attended47 upon many hundreds of thousands of quintillions of buddhas. He thought, “Through what causes and what conditions does the Bhagavat Śākyamuni have such a short lifespan of eighty years?”

2.­2

Then he thought, “The Bhagavat has said, ‘There are two causes and two conditions for a long life. [F.155.b] What are those two? Forsaking killing and giving food.’ The Bhagavat Śākyamuni has forsaken killing and has correctly adopted48 the path of the ten good actions for countless hundreds of thousands of quintillions of eons. He has given external and internal substances as food to beings, even to the extent49 of satisfying hungry beings with his own body, blood, bones, and limbs, to say nothing of every other kind of food.”


3.

Chapter 3: The Differentiation of the Three Bodies

3.­1

The bodhisattva mahāsattva Ākāśagarbha rose from his seat among that assembly and, with his upper robe over one shoulder, knelt on his right knee, placed his palms together in homage, and bowed to the Bhagavat’s feet. He made offerings of flowers made of gold and jewels, precious banners, and sublime parasols, and asked the Bhagavat, “How can the bodhisattva mahāsattvas correctly accomplish the very profound intention of the tathāgatas?”


4.

Chapter 4: The Confession in a Dream

4.­1

The bodhisattva Ruciraketu then went to sleep and in a dream saw a golden drum84 that was shining like the disk of the sun. In all directions there were countless, innumerable buddha bhagavats seated upon precious beryl thrones at the foot of precious wish-fulfilling trees, encircled by assemblies of many hundreds of thousands. Looking straight ahead, they were teaching the Dharma.

4.­2

Then he saw a person who appeared to be a brahmin beating that drum, and he heard a teaching in verse come from the drumbeats.


5.

Chapter 5: The End of the Continuum of Creating Karma

5.­1

Then the Bhagavat dwelled in correct analysis, and as soon as he rested in that extremely profound, supreme samādhi, from the pores of his body there came many hundreds of thousands of light rays of various colors and all buddha realms were illuminated within that light. [F.177.a] Their number could not be exemplified or measured even by the number of sand grains in all the Ganges Rivers in the ten directions.


6.

Chapter 6: The Purification of the Bhūmis

6.­2

Then the bodhisattva mahāsattva [F.189.a] Akṣayamati149 rose from his seat and, with his upper robe over one shoulder, knelt on his right knee, placed his palms together in homage, and bowed toward the Bhagavat. He offered the Bhagavat parasols of various jewels and flowers and baskets of flowers, and then he said to the Bhagavat, “Bhagavat, you have said repeatedly ‘the enlightenment mind, the enlightenment mind.’ Bhagavat, to what extent does a bodhisattva have an enlightenment mind? Bhagavat, what is an enlightenment mind? Bhagavat, if a bodhisattva has no aspiration or focus, has not focused, and will not focus on enlightenment because enlightenment is indescribable, and because aspiration has no form, cannot be shown, is immaterial and imperceivable, then how, Bhagavat, should the meaning of those Dharma teachings be understood?”


7.

Chapter 7: A Praise of All the Realms of the Past, Future, and Present Samyaksaṃbuddhas

7.­2

Then the Bhagavat said to the noble goddess Bodhisattvasamuccayā, “Noble goddess, at that time, in that time, there was a king by the name of Suvarṇabhujendra. Through this praise of all the tathāgatas, The Source of Lotus Flowers, he praised the buddha bhagavats of the past, future, and present.

7.­3
“ ‘The jinas who have appeared in the past,
And the jinas present in worlds in the ten directions,
I pay homage to those jinas
And I praise all those jinas.150

8.

Chapter 8: The Dhāraṇī Called Golden

8.­1

Then the Bhagavat said to the bodhisattva mahāsattva Sukhavihāra within that assembly, “Noble one, any noble man or noble woman who wishes to make an offering to all the buddhas of the past, the future, and the present should carry and possess this dhāraṇī that is called golden. Why is that? It is because this dhāraṇī is the mother of the past, future, and present buddha bhagavats. One who possesses this dhāraṇī will greatly increase their accumulation of merit. Those who planted roots of merit with countless bhagavats of the past will possess and hold this dhāraṇī. Those who have pure, faultless conduct without deterioration [F.202.b] will be able to enter this extremely profound Dharma teaching.”


9.

Chapter 9: Emptiness

9.­1

Then the Bhagavat, having taught that dhāraṇī, in order to benefit and bring happiness to that gathered assembly of bodhisattva mahāsattvas, devas, humans, and so on, and in order to teach the characteristics of the ultimate truth, emptiness, recited these verses:

9.­2
“I have taught the Dharmas of emptiness
Very extensively in countless other sūtras.
Therefore, in this supreme sūtra,
I will teach the Dharmas of emptiness briefly.
9.­3
“Unknowing beings with little intelligence
Are not able to know all the Dharmas.
Therefore, in this supreme sūtra
I will teach the Dharmas of emptiness briefly.

10.

Chapter 10: Fulfilling Wishes on the Basis of Emptiness

10.­1

On hearing that very profound Dharma teaching, the goddess Ratnārcī was delighted and overjoyed. She rose from her seat, and, with her upper robe over one shoulder, knelt on her right knee, placed her palms together in homage, bowed toward the Bhagavat, and in order to ask how to practice this profound teaching, spoke these verses to the Bhagavat:

10.­2
“Jina, supreme two-legged being
Who completely illuminates the world,
I pray that with compassion you teach me
The correct way of enlightened conduct.”

11.

Chapter 11: The Four Mahārājas Look Upon Devas and Humans

11.­1

Then Mahārāja Vaiśravaṇa, Mahārāja Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Mahārāja Virūḍhaka, and Mahārāja Virūpākṣa rose from their seats, and with their upper robes over one shoulder, knelt on their right knees and, with palms together in homage, bowed toward the Bhagavat and said, “Venerable211 Bhagavat, this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light is taught by all tathāgatas; it is viewed by all the tathāgatas; it is thought of212 by all the tathāgatas; it is possessed by all the assemblies of bodhisattvas; it is paid homage to by all the hosts of devas; it is offered to by all the hosts of devas; it is praised by all the hosts of the lords of devas; it is offered to, praised, and honored by all the protectors of the world; it illuminates all the divine mansions; it brings supreme happiness to all beings; it extinguishes all the suffering in the hells, in the lives of animals, and in the realm of Yama; it brings fears to an end; it repels all the armies of enemies; it brings the calamity213 of famines to an end; it brings the calamity214 of disease to an end; it dispels all planetary influences;215 it brings perfect peace; it ends misery and troubles; [F.211.b] and it brings to an end various kinds of calamities‍—it overcomes a hundred thousand calamities.


12.

Chapter 12: The Four Mahārājas Protecting the Land220

12.­2

Then the Bhagavat congratulated the Four Mahārājas, saying, “Excellent, excellent, Mahārājas! Excellent, excellent, you Mahārājas!

12.­3

“It is thus: you have served past jinas, have generated roots of merit, have honored many hundreds of thousands of quintillions of buddhas, have possessed the Dharma, have taught the Dharma, have been kings of the Dharma,221 and have been kings of devas and humans through the Dharma.


13.

Chapter 13: The Dhāraṇī of Nonattachment

13.­2

Then the Bhagavat said to Venerable Śāradvatīputra,277 “Śāradvatīputra, it is thus: this Dharma teaching called The Dhāraṇī of Nonattachment is the mother of the bodhisattvas who meditate on all phenomena. It is the past practice of bodhisattvas and it is held by the bodhisattvas.”

13.­3

Venerable Śāradvatīputra asked the Bhagavat, “Bhagavat, if a dhāraṇī is not located in an object and not located in a direction, then, Bhagavat, what is the meaning of the word dhāraṇī?”


14.

Chapter 14: The Wish-fulfilling Jewel Dhāraṇī

14.­1

Then the Bhagavat, in the midst of the great assembly, said to Venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, there is that which repels all lightning, which has been taught by the samyaksaṃbuddhas of the past. Following them, I also will now teach it, so you should retain it!

14.­2

“Ānanda, to the east there is the lightning called Āgata, to the south there is the lightning called Hundredth Moment, to the west there is the lightning called Waning Light, and to the north there is the lightning called Satamapati.


15.

Chapter 15: The Goddess Sarasvatī

15.­1

Then the great goddess Sarasvatī, with her robe over one shoulder, kneeling with her right knee on the ground and her palms together in homage, bowed toward the Bhagavat and said to the Bhagavat, “Venerable Bhagavat, I, the great goddess Sarasvatī, will bring eloquence to the words of those dharmabhāṇakas so that their words will be beautified. I will also bestow on them the power of mental retention. I will establish them in giving definitions. I will illuminate those dharmabhāṇakas with the great light of knowledge.297 If any line of verse or syllables of this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light is left out, or forgotten, [F.232.a] I will bring all definitions, lines of verse, and syllables to those dharmabhāṇaka bhikṣus.


16.

Chapter 16: The Great Goddess Śrī

16.­1

Then the great goddess Śrī said to the Bhagavat, “Venerable Bhagavat, I, the great goddess Śrī, will also, in whatever way, bring a perfection of requisites to those dharmabhāṇaka bhikṣus so that they will gain freedom from deprivation; will have a resolute371 mind; will day and night have happiness of mind; will learn, understand, and correctly recite all the different words and letters in this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light so that, for the sake of those beings who have planted good roots with hundreds of thousands of buddhas, this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light [F.239.a] will remain for a long time in Jambudvīpa and will not disappear, and so that beings will experience the happiness of devas and humans for many hundreds of thousands of quintillions of eons, and so that there will be no famine and instead excellent harvests. Beings will become happy through being endowed with every kind of happiness. They will be in the company of tathāgatas, and in some future time they will attain the highest, most complete enlightenment of buddhahood. This will end all the suffering in the hells, in the lives of animals, and in the world of Yama. Robes, food, bedding, medicine while ill, requisites, and other necessities will be brought to those dharmabhāṇaka bhikṣus.


17.

Chapter 17: The Increase of Wealth by the Great Goddess Śrī

17.­1

Then the great goddess Śrī said these words to the Bhagavat, “Bhagavat, not far from here to the north, in the environs of Alakāvati, the palace of Mahārāja Vaiśravaṇa, there is a sublime pleasure grove by the name of Puṇya­kusuma­prabha, in which there is a mansion made of the seven precious materials which is called Padmottara­suvarṇa­dhvaja,378 which is where I live.


18.

Chapter 18: Dṛḍhā, the Goddess of the Earth

18.­1

Then Dṛḍhā, the goddess of the earth, said to the Bhagavat, “Venerable Bhagavat, wherever this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light is taught, in the present or in future times, whether in a village, town, market town, [F.241.b] region, wilderness, mountain cave,389 or royal residence‍—wherever, venerable Bhagavat, this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light is taught at length390‍—I, Dṛḍhā, the goddess of the earth, will come to that place.


19.

Chapter 19: Saṃjñeya, the Lord of Yakṣas

19.­1

Then the great yakṣa general Saṃjñeya, accompanied by twenty-eight yakṣa generals, rose from his seat and with his robe over one shoulder, kneeling with his right knee on the ground and with palms together, bowed toward the Bhagavat and said to the Bhagavat, “Venerable Bhagavat, wherever this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light appears, in the present or in future times, whether in a village, town, market town, region, wilderness, mountain cave,396 or royal residence, Bhagavat, I, the great yakṣa general Saṃjñeya, accompanied by twenty-eight yakṣa generals, will come to that village, town, market town, region, wilderness, mountain cave,397 or royal residence.


20.

Chapter 20: The King’s Treatise: The Commitment of the Lord of Devas

20.­1

Then Dṛḍhā, the goddess of the earth, who was seated within that great assembly, rose from her seat, bowed down her head to the Bhagavat’s feet, and then, with her palms placed together, said to the Bhagavat, “Bhagavat, if in any land there is a human king who does not practice the true Dharma, [F.247.b] he will not remain long ruling that land or bringing happiness to many beings through a prestigious reign.


21.

Chapter 21: Susaṃbhava

21.­2

Then at that time, the Bhagavat recited these verses:

21.­3
“Whenever I was a cakravartin king,
I gave away the earth with its oceans.
I offered the four continents
Filled with jewels to the past jinas.
21.­4
“Because I sought the Dharma body,
There was nothing in the past that was pleasant
And cherished that I did not give away,
And in many eons, I even gave up my cherished life.
21.­5
“Many countless eons ago,
I was King Susaṃbhava
Within the teaching of the sugata Ratnaśikhin,
A sugata who had passed into nirvāṇa.

22.

Chapter 22: The Protection Given by Yakṣas

22.­1

“Great goddess Śrī, any noble man or noble woman who has faith and wishes to make an inconceivably, extremely vast and great offering of requisites to the past, future, and present buddha bhagavats, and wishes to know the profound field of activity of the past, future, and present buddhas, whether in a temple or in a wilderness, in whatever place The Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light is being correctly taught, in that place they should, with an undoubting and undistracted mind, pay attention and listen to this Lord King of Sūtras, the Sublime Golden Light.”


23.

Chapter 23: The Prophecy to Ten Thousand Devas

23.­1

When the Bhagavat had said that, the noble goddess Bodhisattvasamuccayā469 asked him, “Venerable Bhagavat, [F.255.b] through what cause and what condition, and through what accomplishment and accumulation of planting good roots, have Jvalanāntara­tejo­rāja and these other ten thousand devas now come from the Trāyastriṃśa paradise, having heard the prophecy to these three sublime beings?

23.­2

“It was thus: this excellent being, the bodhisattva Ruciraketu, in a future time, after many hundreds of thousands of quintillions of asaṃkhyeyas of eons have passed, will attain the highest, most complete enlightenment of buddhahood in the world realm Suvarṇaprabhā. He will appear in that world as the tathāgata arhat samyaksaṃbuddha, the one with wisdom and virtuous conduct,470 the sugata, the one who knows the world’s beings, the unsurpassable guide who tames beings, the teacher of devas and humans, the buddha, the bhagavat by the name of Suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa.


24.

Chapter 24: Ending All Illness

24.­1

“Noble goddess, what were those past prayers? In the past, in a time gone by‍—an inconceivable, vast number, more innumerable than an asaṃkhyeya of eons ago‍—at that time, in that time, the tathāgata arhat samyaksaṃbuddha, the one with wisdom and virtuous conduct, the sugata, the one who knows the world’s beings, the unsurpassable guide who tames beings, the teacher of devas and humans, the buddha, the bhagavat by the name of Ratnaśikhin appeared in the world.


25.

Chapter 25: The Story of the Fish Guided by Jalavāhana

25.­1

“And so, noble goddess, Jalavāhana, the head merchant’s son, had cured the illnesses in the kingdom of King Sureśvaraprabha, so that there were few illnesses and people had the enthusiasm and physical strength they had previously possessed. All the beings in the kingdom of King Sureśvaraprabha were happy, enjoyed amusements, performed acts of generosity, and created merit. They praised Jalavāhana, the head merchant’s son, saying, ‘May Jalavāhana, the head merchant’s son, be victorious! May he be victorious! He is the king of healing,483 who heals the illnesses of all beings. He is the visible presence of a bodhisattva, and he knows all the eight branches of the Āyurveda.’


26.

Chapter 26: The Gift of the Body to a Tigress

26.­2

“Moreover, noble goddess, bodhisattvas give away their bodies in order to benefit others. What is that like?

26.­3

“The Bhagavat,499 with the light rays of a hundred various, stainless, and vast qualities shining on the earth500 and in the paradises, with the vision of unimpeded wisdom, and the power to suppress adversaries,501 accompanied by a thousand bhikṣus, was traveling and passing through the Pañcāla502 land and came to a forest.


27.

Chapter 27: Praise by All Bodhisattvas

27.­1

Then those hundreds of thousands of bodhisattvas went to where the Tathāgata Suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa was. When they arrived, they bowed down their heads to the feet of the Bhagavat Tathāgata Suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa and arranged themselves to one side. Having arranged themselves to one side, those hundreds of thousands of bodhisattvas placed their palms together and praised the Tathāgata Suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa with these verses:


28.

Chapter 28: The Praise of All Tathāgatas

28.­1

Then the bodhisattva Ruciraketu rose from his seat, and, with his upper robe over one shoulder, [F.272.a] knelt on his right knee with palms together, bowed toward the Bhagavat, and then praised the Bhagavat with these verses:

28.­2
“Lord of munis, you have the signs of a hundred merits;
You are adorned by the qualities of a thousand beautiful splendors.
You have an exalted541 color, you manifest supreme peace,
And you shine with light like a thousand suns.

29.

Chapter 29: The Conclusion

29.­1

Then the noble goddess Bodhisattvasamuccayā praised the Bhagavat with these verses:

29.­2
“I pay homage to the Buddha who has pure knowledge,
Who has the knowledge with eloquence in the pure Dharma,
Who has the knowledge that is free from the path of bad actions,
And has the pure knowledge of existence and nonexistence.
29.­3
“Oh! Oh! The Buddha’s magnificence is infinite!
Oh! Oh! He is like the ocean and Mount Sumeru!
Oh! Oh! The Buddha’s activity is infinite!
He is extremely rare like a fig tree flower!

c.

Colophon

c.­1

Translated and revised by the Paṇḍitas Jinamitra and Nelendrabodhi, and by the Lotsawa Yeshe Dé, the chief editor, and definitively revised according to the new language reform.550


ab.

Abbreviations

BG Translation by Bao Gui 寶貴, titled 合部金光明經 (Taishō 664).
TWC Translation by Dharmakṣema, a.k.a. Tan Wuchen 曇無讖, titled 金光明經 (Taishō 663).
YJ Translation by Yijing 義淨, titled 金光明最勝王經 (Taishō 665).

n.

Notes

n.­1
The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (3) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, Toh 557).
n.­2
The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (1) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottamasūtra, Toh 555).
n.­3
dbu ma rin po che’i sgron ma (Madhyamaka­ratna­pradīpa), Toh 3854.
n.­4
(1) The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī (Mañjuśrī­mūla­kalpa, Toh 543), 2.­129; (2) ral pa gyen brdzes kyi rtog pa chen po byang chub sems dpa’ chen po’i rnam par ’phrul pa le’u rab ’byams las bcom ldan ’das ma ’phags ma sgrol ma’i rtsa ba’i rtog pa (Ūrdhvajaṭā-mahā­kalpa­mahā­bodhi­sattva­vikurvaṇapaṭalavisarā bhagavatī āryatārā­mūla­kalpa), Toh 724, folio 238.a; (3) dkyil ’khor thams cad kyi spyi’i cho ga gsang ba’i rgyud (Sarva­maṇḍala­sāmānyavidhi­guhya­tantra), Toh 806, folio 152.b.
n.­5
(1) Vinayadatta, sgyu ’phrul chen mo’i dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga bla ma’i zhal snga’i man ngag (Gurūpadeśa­nāma­mahā­māyā­maṇḍalopāyikā), Toh 1645, folio 209.a; (2) Bhavyakīrti, sgron ma gsal bar byed pa dgongs pa rab gsal zhes bya ba bshad pa’i ti ka (Pradīpoddyotanābhisaṃdhi­prakāśikā­nāma­vyākhyā­ṭīkā), Toh 1793, folio 201.a; (3) Pramuditākaravarman, gsang ba ’dus pa rgyud kyi rgyal po’i bshad pa zla ba’i ’od zer (Guhya­samāja­tantra­rāja­ṭīkā­candra­prabhā), Toh 1852, folio 169.b; (4) Vitapāda, gsang ba ’dus pa’i dkyil ’khor gyi sgrub pa’i thabs rnam par bshad pa (Guhya­samāja­maṇḍalopāyikā­ṭīkā), Toh 1873, folio 209.a; (5) Ānandagarbha, rdo rje dbyings kyi dkyil ’khor chen po’i cho ga rdo rje thams cad ’byung ba (Vajra­dhātu­mahā­maṇḍalopāyikā­sarva­vajrodaya), Toh 2516, folio 50.a; (6) Anonymous,’jam pa’i rdo rje ’byung ba’i dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga sems can thams cad kyi bde ba bskyed pa (Mañju­vajrodaya­maṇḍalopāyikā­sarva­sattva­hitāvahā). Toh 2590; (7) Kāmadhenu, ngan song thams cad yongs su sbyong ba gzi brjid kyi rgyal po zhes bya ba cho ga zhib mo’i rgyal po chen po’i rgya cher ’grel pa (Sarva­durgati­pariśodhana­tejorāja­nāma­mahā­kalpa­rāja­ṭīkā), Toh 2625; (8) Ānandagarbha, de bzhin gshegs pa dgra bcom pa yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas ngan song thams cad yongs su sbyong ba gzi brjid kyi rgyal po zhes bya ba’i bshad pa (Sarva­durgati­pariśodhana­tejorāja­tathāgatārhat­samyak­saṃbuddha­nāma­kalpa­ṭīkā), Toh 2628, folio 73.a; (9) Sthiramati, rgyan dam pa sna tshogs rim par phye ba bkod pa (Paramālaṃkāra­viśva­paṭala­vyūha), Toh 2661, folio 322.b; (10) Sahajalalita, kun nas sgor ’jug pa’i ’od zer gtsug tor dri ma med par snang ba de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi snying po dang dam tshig la rnam par blta ba zhes bya ba’i gzungs kyi rnam par bshad pa (Samanta­mukha­praveśa­raśmi­vimaloṣṇīṣa­prabhāsa­sarva­tathāgata­hṛdaya­samayavilokita­nāma­dhāraṇī­vṛtti), Toh 2688, folio 292.b.
n.­6
(1) Bodhisattva, kun nas sgor ’jug pa’i ’od zer gtsug tor dri ma med par snang ba’i gzungs bklag cing chod rten brgya rtsa brgyad dam mchod rten lnga gdab pa’i cho ga mdo sde las btus pa (Samanta­mukha­praveśa­raśmi­vimaloṣṇīṣa­prabhāsa­dhāraṇī­vacana­sūtrāntoddhṛtāṣṭottara­śata­caityāntara­pañca­caitya­nirvapaṇa­vidhi), Toh 3068, folios 145.a, 151.b, 153.b; (2) Dīpaṁkaraśrījñāna, dbu ma’i man ngag rin po che’i za ma tog kha phye ba zhes bya ba (Ratna­karaṇḍodghāṭa­nāma­madhyamakopadeśa), Toh 3930, folios 99.a, 115.a; (3) Śāntideva, bslab pa kun las btus pa (Śikṣāsamuccaya), Toh 3940, folios 3.a–194.b, 90.a–91.b, 122.a–123.b; (4) Vairocanarakṣita, bslab pa me tog snye ma (Śikṣā­kusuma­mañjarī), Toh 3943, folio 200.a; (5) Dīpaṁkaraśrījñāna, byang chub lam gyi sgron ma’i dka’ ’grel (Bodhi­mārga­pradīpa­pañjikā), Toh 3948, folio 20.b.
n.­7
(1) Anonymous, gser ’od dam pa mdo sde dbang po’i smon lam (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtrendra­praṇidhāna), Toh 4379; (2) Anonymous, rgyal po gser gyi lag pa’i smon lam (Rāja­suvarṇa­bhuja­praṇidhāna), Toh 4380.
n.­8
(1) Dīpaṁkaraśrījñāna, mngon par rtogs pa rnam par ’byed pa (Abhisamaya­vibhaṅga­nāma), Toh 1490, folio 201.a; (2) Āryadeva, spyod pa bsdud pa’i sgron ma (Caryāmelāpaka­pradīpa), Toh 1803, folio 106.a; (3) Mañjuśrīkīrti,’jam dpal gyi mtshan yang dag par brjod pa’i rgya cher bshad pa (Mañjuśri­nāma­saṃgīti­ṭīkā), Toh 2534, folio 217.b; (4) Haribhadra, shes rab kyi pha tol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i bshad pa mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi snang ba (Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­vyākhyānābhisamayālaṃkārāloka), Toh 3791, folio 84.b; (5) Dharmakīrtiśrī, shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan zhes bya ba’i ’grel pa rtogs par dka’ ba’i snang ba zhes bya ba’i ’grel bshad (Abhisamayālaṃkāra­nāma­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­vṛtti­durbodhāloka­nāma­ṭīkā), Toh 3794, folio 152.b; (6) Dharmamitra, shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i ’grel bshad tshig rab tu gsal ba (Abhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­ṭīkāprasphuṭapadā), Toh 3796, folio 104.a.
n.­22
There have been two ways to interpret this traditional beginning of a sūtra, with such Indian masters as Kamalaśīla claiming that both are equally correct. The alternative interpretation is “Thus did I hear: at one time the Bhagavān …” and so on. The various arguments, both traditional and modern, for either side are given by Brian Galloway in “Thus Have I Heard: At one time…” Indo-Iranian Journal 34, Issue 2 (April 1991): 87–104.
n.­23
Toh 555 has “ten million times ninety-eight thousand.”
n.­47
lhag par bya bar byas pa. Toh 557 has bsnyen bkur byas pa.
n.­48
yang dag par blangs te gnas par gyur. Toh 557 has yang dag par blangs par gyur.
n.­49
cher na. Toh 557 has tha na.
n.­84
The Sanskrit translates as “he saw a bherī drum made of gold.”
n.­149
In Toh 555 instead of Akṣayamati, this is the bodhisattva Blazing Light Rays of Unhindered Traits of Lions (seng ge’i mtshan thogs pa med pa’i ’od zer ’bar ba).
n.­150
The Sanskrit translates as “the saṅgha of those jinas.”
n.­211
“Venerable” is here absent in the Sanskrit.
n.­212
According to the Tibetan dgongs pa. The Sanskrit has samanvāgataḥ (“provided by”).
n.­213
From the Sanskrit kāntāra. The Tibetan translates as its other meaning dgon pa (“wilderness”). Toh 555 has dus ngan (“bad times”).
n.­214
From the Sanskrit kāntāra. The Tibetan translates as its other meaning dgon pa (“wilderness”). Toh 555 has sdug bsngal (“suffering”).
n.­215
According to the Tibetan, presumably translating from graha or possibly pramathana. The Sanskrit has jñānaprakāśakaḥ (“it manifests wisdom”). Toh 555 has ltas ngan (“bad omens”).
n.­220
The preceding chapter, this chapter, and the following chapter form one chapter in Toh 557.
n.­221
This phrase is absent in Toh 557 and in the Sanskrit.
n.­277
According to the Yongle, Lithang, Kangxi, Choné, and Lhasa (śā ra dwa ti’i bu). The Degé omits the long vowel: Śaradvatiputra (śa ra dwa ti’i bu). The Narthang has both śā ra dra ti’i bu and śa ra drā ti’i bu.
n.­297
Toh 556 has shes pa, Toh 557 has ye shes, and the Sanskrit has jñāna.
n.­371
According to the Sanskrit svastha and to the Narthang of Toh 557, which reads brtan. The Yongle and Kangxi versions of Toh 557 have rtag (“permanent”). The Degé version has brtas (“increased”).
n.­378
This translates as “Sublime Lotus Golden Banner.” In the Sanskrit and Toh 557, there is only Suvarṇadhvaja (“Golden Banner”). Toh 555 does not mention her residence.
n.­389
According to the Sanskrit girikandara. Toh 557 has ri’i sman ljongs (“land of mountain herbs”)
n.­390
According to the Sanskrit. This is made into the subsequent sentence in the Tibetan.
n.­396
According to the Sanskrit girikandara. Toh 557 has ri’i sman ljongs (“land of mountain herbs”).
n.­397
According to the Sanskrit girikandara. Toh 557 has ri’i sman ljongs (“land of mountain herbs”).
n.­469
The Sanskrit has bodhisattva­samuccayā.
n.­470
This refers to the eightfold path, with wisdom being the right view and conduct being the other seven aspects of the path.
n.­483
Absent in the Sanskrit.
n.­499
Although this is presented as a narration by the Buddha, he is described in the third person.
n.­500
According to the Sanskrit, the Yongle, Lithang, Kangxi, and Choné versions of Toh 556, and Toh 557. The Degé version of Toh 556 has ba instead of sa.
n.­501
The Sanskrit also has “having attained the five kinds of vision.”
n.­502
According to the Tibetan lnga lan pa and in Toh 555 the transliterated pañcala. The Bhagji edition has prañcala.
n.­541
From the Sanskrit udāra, which the Tibetan has translated as rgya che (“vast”).
n.­550
This reform of the spelling of written Tibetan‍—which included, for example, eliminating the secondary suffix da‍—was made in 816, during the reign of King Ralpachen (born ca. 806, r. 815–38).

b.

Bibliography

Primary Sources in Tibetan and Chinese

gser ’od dam pa’i mdo. Toh 555, Degé Kangyur vol. 89 (rgyud ’bum, pa), folios 19.a–151a. English translation The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (1) 2023.

gser ’od dam pa mdo sde’i dbang po’i rgyal po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtrendra­rājanāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 556, Degé Kangyur vol. 89 (rgyud ’bum, pa), folios 151.b–273.a.

gser ’od dam pa mdo sde’i dbang po’i rgyal po zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtrendra­rāja­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 557, Degé Kangyur vol. 90 (rgyud ’bum, pha), folios 1.a–62.a. English translation The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (3) 2024.

Hebu jin guangming 合部金光明經. Taishō 664 (CBETA, SAT). (Translation of Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra by Bao Gui 寶貴).

Jin guangming jin 金光明經. Taishō 663 (CBETA, SAT). (Translation of Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra by Dharmakṣema, a.k.a. Tan Wuchen 曇無讖).

Jin guangming zuisheng wang jin 金光明最勝王經. Taishō 665 (CBETA, SAT). (Translation of Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra by Yijing 義淨).

Secondary References‍—Kangyur

dkyil ’khor thams cad kyi spyi’i cho ga gsang ba’i rgyud (Sarva­maṇḍala­sāmānyavidhi­guhya­tantra). Toh 806, Degé Kangyur vol. 96 (rgyud, wa), folios 141.a–167.b.

’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud (Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa). Toh 543, Degé Kangyur vol.88 (rgyud, na), folios 105.a–351.a. English translation The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī 2020.

’od srung kyi le’u zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Kāśyapa­parivarta­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 87, Degé Kangyur vol. 44 (dkon brtsegs, cha), folios 119.b–151.b.

ral pa gyen brdzes kyi rtog pa chen po byang chub sems dpa’ chen po’i rnam par ’phrul pa le’u rab ’byams las bcom ldan ’das ma ’phags ma sgrol ma’i rtsa ba’i rtog pa zhes bya ba (Ūrdhvajaṭā­mahā­kalpa­mahā­bodhi­sattva­vikurvaṇa­paṭalavisarā bhagavatī ārya­tārā­mūla­kalpa­nāma). Toh 724, Degé Kangyur vol. 93 (rgyud, tsa), folios 205.b–311.a, and vol. 94 (rgyud, tsha), folios 1.a–200.a.

blo gros mi zad pas zhus pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Akṣaya­mati­paripṛcchā­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 89, Degé Kangyur vol. 44 (dkon brtsegs, cha), folios 175.b–182.b.

lang kar gshegs pa’i theg pa chen po’i mdo (Laṅkāvatāra­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 107, Degé Kangyur vol. 49 (mdo sde, ca), folios 56.a–191.b.

las kyi sgrib pa gcod pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Karmā­varaṇa­prati­praśrabdhi­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra). Toh 219, Degé Kangyur vol. 62 (mdo sde, tsha), folios 297.b–307.a. English translation Putting an End to Karmic Obscurations 2024.

Secondary References‍—Tengyur

Ajitaśrībhadra. dga’ ba’i bshes gnyen gyi rtogs pa (Nandamitrāvadāna). Toh 4146, Degé Tengyur vol. 269 (’dul ba, su), folios 240.a–244.b.

Ānandagarbha. rdo rje dbyings kyi dkyil ’khor chen po’i cho ga rdo rje thams cad ’byungs ba (Vajra­dhātu­mahā­maṇḍalopāyikā­sarva­vajrodaya). Toh 2516, Degé Tengyur vol. 62 (rgyud, ku), folios 1.a–50.a.

Anonymous. rgyal po gser gyi lag pa’i smon lam (Rāja­suvarṇa­bhuja­praṇidhāna). Toh 4380, Degé Tengyur vol. 309 (sna tshogs, nyo), folios 309b–310a.

Anonymous. ’jam pa’i rdo rje ’byung ba’i dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga sems can thams cad kyi bde ba bskyed pa (Mañju­vajrodaya­maṇḍalopāyikā­sarva­sattva­hitāvahā). Toh 2590, Degé Tengyur vol. 65 (rgyud, ngu), folios 225.a–274.a.

Anonymous. gser ’od dam pa mdo sde dbang po’i smon lam (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtrendra­praṇidhāna). Toh 4379, Degé Tengyur vol. 309 (sna tshogs, nyo), folios 304.b–309.b.

Āryadeva. spyod pa bsdud pa’i sgron ma (Caryāmelāpaka­pradīpa). Toh 1803, Degé Tengyur vol. 65 (rgyud, ngi), folios 57.a–106.b.

Bhavya. dbu ma rin po che’i sgron ma (Madhyamaka­ratna­pradīpa). Toh 3854, Degé Tengyur vol. 199 (dbu ma, tsha), folios 259.b–289.a.

Bhavyakīrti. sgron ma gsal bar byed pa dgongs pa rab gsal zhes bya ba bshad pa’i ti ka (Pradīpoddyotanābhisaṁdhi­prakāśikā­nāma­vyākhyā­ṭīkā). Toh 1793, Degé Tengyur vols. 32–33 (rgyud, ki), folios 1.b–292.a, and (rgyud, khi), folios 1.b–155.a.

Bodhisattva. kun nas sgor ’jug pa’i ’od zer gtsug tor dri ma med par snang ba’i gzungs bklag cing chod rten brgya rtsa brgyad dam mchod rten lnga gdab pa’i cho ga mdo sde las btus pa (Samanta­mukha­praveśa­raśmi­vimaloṣṇīṣa­prabhāsa­dhāraṇī­vacana­sūtrāntoddhṛtāṣṭottara­śata­caityāntara­pañca­caitya­nirvapaṇa­vidhi). Toh 3068, Degé Tengyur vol. 74 (rgyud, pu), folios 140.a–153.a.

Buddhānandagarbha. de bzhin gshegs pa dgra bcom pa yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas ngan song thams cad yongs su sbyong ba gzi brjid kyi rgyal po zhes bya ba’i bshad pa (Sarva­durgati­pariśodhana­tejorāja­tathāgatārhat­samyaksaṃbuddha­nāma­kalpa­ṭīkā). Toh 2628, Degé Tengyur vol. 68 (rgyud, ju), folios 1.a–97.a.

Dharmakīrtiśrī. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan zhes bya ba’i ’grel pa rtogs par dka’ ba’i snang ba zhes bya ba’i ’grel bshad (Abhisamayālaṃkāra­nāma­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­vṛtti­durbodhāloka­nāma­ṭīkā). Toh 3794, Degé Tengyur vol. 86 (sher phyin, ja), folios 140.b–254.a.

Dharmamitra. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa’i man ngag gi bstan bcos mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi tshig le’ur byas pa’i ’grel bshad tshig rab tu gsal ba (Abhisamayālaṃkāra­kārikā­prajñā­pāramitopadeśa­śāstra­ṭīkāprasphuṭapadā). Toh 3796, Degé Tengyur vol. 87 (sher phyin, nya), folios 1.a–110.a.

Dīpaṁkaraśrījñāna. dbu ma’i man ngag rin po che’i za ma tog kha phye ba zhes bya ba (Ratna­karaṇḍodghāṭa­nāma­madhyamakopadeśa). Toh 3930, Degé Tengyur vol. 212 (dbu ma, ki), folios 96.b–116.b.

Dīpaṁkaraśrījñāna. byang chub lam gyi sgron ma’i dka’ ’grel (Bodhi­mārga­pradīpa­pañjikā). Toh 3948, Degé Tengyur vol. 213 (mdo ’grel, khi), folios 241.a–293.a.

Dīpaṁkaraśrījñāna. mngon par rtogs pa rnam par ’byed pa zhes bya ba (Abhisamaya­vibhaṅga­nāma). Toh 1490, Degé Tengyur vol. 22 (rgyud, zha), folios 186.a–202.b.

Ekādaśanirghoṣa. rdo rje ’chang chen po’i lam gyi rim pa’i man ngag bdud rtsi gsang ba (Mahā­vajra­dhara­patha­kramopadeśāmṛta­guhya). Toh 1823, Degé Tengyur vol. 35 (rgyud, ngi), folios 267.b–278.a.

Haribhadra. shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa brgyad stong pa’i bshad pa mngon par rtogs pa’i rgyan gyi snang ba (Aṣṭa­sāhasrikā­prajñā­pāramitā­vyākhyānābhi­samayālaṃkārāloka). Toh 3791, Degé Tengyur vol. 85 (sher phyin, cha), folios 1.a–341.a.

Kāmadhenu. ngan song thams cad yongs su sbyong ba gzi brjid kyi rgyal po zhes bya ba cho ga zhib mo’i rgyal po chen po’i rgya cher ’grel pa (Sarva­durgati­pariśodhana­tejorāja­nāma­mahā­kalpa­rāja­ṭīkā). Toh 2625, Degé Tengyur vol. 666 (rgyud, cu), folios 231.a–341.a.

Mañjuśrīkīrti. ’jam dpal gyi mtshan yang dag par brjod pa’i rgya cher bshad pa (Mañjuśrī­nāma­saṃgīti­ṭīkā). Toh 2534, Degé Tengyur vol. 63 (gyud, khu), folios 115.b–301.a.

Paltsek (dpal brtsegs). gsung rab rin po che’i gtam rgyud dang shA kya’i rabs rgyud. Toh 4357, Degé Tengyur vol. 306 (sna tshogs, co), folios 239.a–377.a.

Paltsek (dpal brtsegs). pho brang stod thang lhan dkar gyi chos ’gyur ro cog gi dkar chag. Toh 4364, Degé Tengyur vol. 308 (sna tshogs, jo), folios 294.b–310.a.

Pramuditākaravarman. gsang ba ’dus pa rgyud kyi rgyal po’i bshad pa zla ba’i ’od zer (Guhya­samāja­tantra­rāja­ṭīkā­candra­prabhā). Toh 1852, Degé Tengyur vol. 41 (rgyud, thi), folios 120.a–313.a.

Sahajalalita. kun nas sgor ’jug pa’i ’od zer gtsug tor dri ma med par snang ba de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi snying po dang dam tshig la rnam par blta ba zhes bya ba’i gzungs kyi rnam par bshad pa (Samanta­mukha­praveśa­raśmi­vimaloṣṇīṣa­prabhāsa­sarva­tathāgata­hṛdaya­samayavilokita­nāma­dhāraṇī­vṛtti). Toh 2688, Degé Tengyur vol. 71 (rgyud, thu), folios 269.a–320.b.

Śāntideva. bslab pa kun las btus pa (Śikṣāsamuccaya). Toh 3940, Degé Tengyur vol. 111 (dbu ma, khi), folios 3.a–194.b.

Sthiramati. rgyan dam pa sna tshogs rim par phye ba bkod pa (Paramālaṃkāra­viśva­paṭala­vyūha). Toh 2661, Degé Tengyur vol. 68 (rgyud, ju), folios 317.a–339.a.

Vairocanarakṣita. bslab pa me tog snye ma (Śikṣā­kusuma­mañjarī). Toh 3943, Degé Tengyur vol. 213 (dbu ma, khi), folios 196.a–217.a.

Various authors. bye brag tu rtogs par byed pa [chen po] (Mahāvyutpatti*). Toh 4346, Degé Tengyur vol. 306 (sna tshogs, co), folios 1.a–131.a.

Various authors. sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa. Toh 4347, Degé Tengyur vol. 306 (sna tshogs, co), folios 131.b–160.a.

Vinayadatta. sgyu ’phrul chen mo’i dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga bla ma’i zhal snga’i man ngag (Gurūpadeśa­nāma­mahā­māyā­maṇḍalopāyikā). Toh 1645, Degé Tengyur vol. 25 (rgyud, ya), folios 290.a–309.a.

Vitapāda. gsang ba ’dus pa’i dkyil ’khor gyi sgrub pa’i thabs rnam par bshad pa (Guhya­samāja­maṇḍalopāyikā­ṭīkā). Toh 1873, Degé Tengyur vol. 43 (rgyud, ni), folios 178.b–219.a.

Wönch’ük (Wen tsheg). dgongs pa zab mo nges par ’grel pa’i mdo rgya cher ’grel pa (Gambhīra­saṁdhi­nirmocana­sūtra­ṭīkā). Toh 4016, Degé Tengyur vol. 220 (mdo ’grel, ti), folios 1.b–291.a; vol. 221 (mdo ’grel, thi), folios 1.b–272.a; and vol. 222 (mdo ’grel, di), folios 1.b–175.a.

Yeshe Dé (ye shes sde). lang kar gshegs pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo’i ’grel pa de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po’i rgyan (Laṅkāvatāra­nāma­mahā­yāna­sūtra­vṛtti­tathāgata­hṛdayālaṃkāra), Toh 4019, Degé Tengyur vol. 224 (mdo ’grel, pi), folios 1.a–310.a.

Other References in Tibetan

Kalzang Dolma (skal bzang sgrol ma). lo tsA ba ’gos chos grub dang khong gi ’gyur rtsom mdo mdzangs blun gyi lo tsA’i thabs rtsal skor la dpyad pa. In krung go’i bod kyi shes rig, vol. 77, pp. 31–53. Beijing: krung go’i bod kyi shes rig dus deb khang, 2007.

Lotsawa Gö Chödrup (lo tsā ba ’gos chos grub). In gangs ljongs skad gnyis smra ba du ma’i ’gyur byang blo gsal dga’ skyed, pp. 17–18. Xining: kan lho bod rigs rang skyong khul rtsom sgyur cu’u, 1983.

Ngawang Lobsang Choden (nga dbang blo bzang chos ldan). ’phags pa gser ’od dam pa mdo sde’i dbang po’i rgyal po’i ’don thabs cho ga (A Rite That Is a Method for Reciting the Noble Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light), s.n. s.l. n.d.

Pema Karpo (pad ma dkar po). gser ’od dam pa nas gsungs pa’i bshags pa. In The Collected Works of Kun-mkhyen padma dkar po, vol. 9 (ta), pp. 519–24. Darjeeling: kargyu sungrab nyamso khang, 1973–74.

Other References in English and Other Languages

Bagchi, S., ed. Suvarṇa­prabhāsa­sūtram. Darbhanga: The Mithila Institute, 1967. Digital Sanskrit Buddhist Canon.

Banerjee, Radha. Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra. London: British Library, 2006. http://idp.bl.uk/downloads/GoldenLight.pdf.

Buswell Jr., Robert E., and Donald Lopez Jr. The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism. Princeton University Press, 2014.

Di, Guan. “The Sanskrit Fragments Preserved in Arthur M. Sackler Museum of Peking University.” Annual Report of the Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University for the Academic Year 2013, vol. XVII (Tokyo Soka University, 2014): 109–18.

Lewis, Todd T. “Contributions to the Study of Popular Buddhism: The Newar Buddhist Festival of Guṃlā Dharma.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 16, no. 2 (Winter 1993): 309–54.

Nanjio Bunyiu, Idzumi Hokei. The Suvarṇaprabhāsa Sūtra: A Mahāyāna Text Called “The Golden Splendour.” Kyoto: The Eastern Buddhist Society, 1931.

Nobel, Johannes (1937). Suvarṇabhāsottama­sūtra. Das Goldglanz-Sūtra: ein Sanskrit text des Mahāyāna-Buddhismus. Nach den Handschriften und mit Hilfe der tibetischen und chinesischen Übertragungen. Leipzig: Harrassowitz.

Nobel, Johannes (1944). Suvarṇa­bhāsottama­sūtra. Das Goldglanz-Sūtra: ein Sanskrit text des Mahāyāna-Buddhismus. Die Tibetischen Überstzungen mit einem Wörterbuch. Leiden: E. J. Brill.

Nobel, Johannes (1944, 1950). Suvarṇabhāsottamasūtra. Das Goldglanz-Sūtra: ein Sanskrit text des Mahāyāna-Buddhismus. Die Tibetishcen Überstzungen mit einem Wörterbuch. 2 vols. Leiden: E. J. Brill.

Radich, Michael (2014). “On the Sources, Style and Authorship of Chapters of the Synoptic Suvarṇaprabhasa-sūtra T644 Ascribed to Paramārtha (Part 1).” Annual Report of the Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University for the Academic Year 2013, vol. XVII (Tokyo Soka University, 2014): 207–44.

Radich, Michael (2016). “Tibetan Evidence for the Sources of Chapters of the Synoptic Suvarṇa-prabhāsottama-sūtra T 664 A Ascribed to Paramārtha.” Buddhist Studies Review 32.2 (2015): 245–70. Sheffield, UK: Equinox Publishing.

Tanaka, Kimiaki. An Illustrated History of the Mandala From Its Genesis to the Kālacakratantra. Somerville, MA: Wisdom Publications, 2018.

Tyomkin, E. N. “Unique Sanskrit Fragments of ‘The Sūtra of Golden Light’ in the Manuscript Collection of the St. Petersburg Branch of the Institute of Oriental Studies.” In Manuscripta Orientalia vol. 1, no. 1 (July 1995): 29–38. St. Petersburg: Russian Academy of Sciences.

Yuama, Akira. “The Golden Light in Central Asia.” In Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University for the Academic Year 2003 (Tokyo: Soka University, 2004): 3–32.

Translations

Emmerick, R. E. The Sūtra of Golden Light. Oxford: The Pali Text Society, 2004.

Foundation for the Preservation of the Mahayana Tradition (FPMT). Sutra of Golden Light, 21-Chapter.

Nobel, Johannes. Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, Das Goldglanz-Sutra, ein Sanskrittext des Mahayana Buddhismus. I-Tsing’s chinesische Version und ihre Übersetzung. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1958.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara AD

“Clear Light.” The highest of the three paradises that correspond to the second dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­2

Abhayakīrti

Wylie:
  • ’jigs med grags pa
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་མེད་གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhayakīrti AD

A buddha.

(Toh 555: bsnyengs pa mi mnga’ ba’i grags pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­28
g.­3

acacia

Wylie:
  • shI ri shA
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱི་རི་ཤཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • śirīṣa AS

Albizia lebbeck. A tall tree that can grow to 100 feet. Other common names include Indian walnut, lebbeck, lebbeck tree, flea tree, frywood, koko, and “woman’s tongue tree.” The bark is used medicinally.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­4

ācārya

Wylie:
  • slob dpon
Tibetan:
  • སློབ་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • ācārya

A spiritual teacher, meaning one who knows the conduct or practice (ācāra) to be performed. It can also be a title for a scholar, though that is not the context in this sūtra.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 5.­8
  • 13.­6
g.­5

aerial palace

Wylie:
  • gzhal med khang
Tibetan:
  • གཞལ་མེད་ཁང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vimāna AS

These palaces served as both vehicles and residences for deities.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­27
  • 18.­14
g.­6

affliction

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The essentially pure nature of mind is obscured and afflicted by various psychological defilements, which destroy the mind’s peace and composure and lead to unwholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind, acting as causes for continued existence in saṃsāra. Included among them are the primary afflictions of desire (rāga), anger (dveṣa), and ignorance (avidyā). It is said that there are eighty-four thousand of these negative mental qualities, for which the eighty-four thousand categories of the Buddha’s teachings serve as the antidote.

Kleśa is also commonly translated as “negative emotions,” “disturbing emotions,” and so on. The Pāli kilesa, Middle Indic kileśa, and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kleśa all primarily mean “stain” or “defilement.” The translation “affliction” is a secondary development that derives from the more general (non-Buddhist) classical understanding of √kliś (“to harm,“ “to afflict”). Both meanings are noted by Buddhist commentators.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 15.­21
  • 15.­97
  • 24.­6
  • g.­150
g.­7

agarwood

Wylie:
  • a ga ru
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་ག་རུ།
Sanskrit:
  • agaru AS

Amyris agallocha. Also called agallochum and aloeswood. This is a resinous heartwood that has been infected by the fungus Phialophora parasitica. In India, agarwood is primarily derived from the fifteen Aquilaria (Aquilaria malaccensis) and nine Gyrinops species of lign-aloe trees.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­73
  • 15.­5
  • n.­256
g.­8

Āgata

Wylie:
  • ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • āgata RP

A god who is the king of lightning in the eastern direction.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­2
g.­9

Akaniṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The eighth and highest level of the Realm of Form (rūpadhātu), the last of the five pure abodes (śuddhāvāsa); it is only accessible as the result of specific states of dhyāna. According to some texts this is where non-returners (anāgāmin) dwell in their last lives. In other texts it is the realm of the enjoyment body (saṃbhoga­kāya) and is a buddhafield associated with the Buddha Vairocana; it is accessible only to bodhisattvas on the tenth level.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­10

Ākāśagarbha

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśagarbha AD

A bodhisattva.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40-41
  • 1.­4
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­64
  • 8.­32
g.­11

Ākāśaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśaghoṣa AD

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­12

Ākāśapāla

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ skyong
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśapāla AD

A Licchavī youth.

(Toh 555: nam mkha’ skyabs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­13

Ākāśavat

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ bzhin
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་བཞིན།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśavat AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: bsam pa nam mkha’ ci bzhin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­14

Ākāśa­viśuddha­prajña

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ rnam dag shes rab
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་རྣམ་དག་ཤེས་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśa­viśuddha­prajña AD

A deva.

(Toh 555: nam mkha’i blo gros rnam par dag pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­15

Akṣayamati

Wylie:
  • blo gros mi zad
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་མི་ཟད།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣayamati AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: seng ge’i mtshan thogs pa med pa’i ’od zer ’bar ba)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­50
  • 6.­2
  • 8.­36
  • n.­149
g.­16

Akṣobhya

Wylie:
  • mi ’khrugs pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཁྲུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣobhya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Lit. “Not Disturbed” or “Immovable One.” The buddha in the eastern realm of Abhirati. A well-known buddha in Mahāyāna, regarded in the higher tantras as the head of one of the five buddha families, the vajra family in the east.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • i.­84
  • 1.­16
  • 2.­5
  • 5.­69
  • 8.­7
  • 17.­15
  • 21.­29
  • g.­372
g.­17

Alakāvati

Wylie:
  • lcang lo can
Tibetan:
  • ལྕང་ལོ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • alakāvati AS

The kingdom of yakṣas located on Mount Sumeru and ruled over by Kubera, also known as Vaiśravaṇa.

(Toh 555: nor ldan)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­78
  • 17.­1
  • g.­168
  • g.­345
g.­18

Alpormika

Wylie:
  • dba’ rlabs chung
Tibetan:
  • དབའ་རླབས་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • alpormika AD

A nāga king.

(Toh 555: dba’ rlabs chung ngu)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­19

Always Concentrated

Wylie:
  • rtag tu ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རྟག་ཏུ་ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­20

Amitābha

Wylie:
  • ’od dpag med
Tibetan:
  • འོད་དཔག་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • amitābha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The buddha of the western buddhafield of Sukhāvatī, where fortunate beings are reborn to make further progress toward spiritual maturity. Amitābha made his great vows to create such a realm when he was a bodhisattva called Dharmākara. In the Pure Land Buddhist tradition, popular in East Asia, aspiring to be reborn in his buddha realm is the main emphasis; in other Mahāyāna traditions, too, it is a widespread practice. For a detailed description of the realm, see The Display of the Pure Land of Sukhāvatī, Toh 115. In some tantras that make reference to the five families he is the tathāgata associated with the lotus family.

Amitābha, “Infinite Light,” is also known in many Indian Buddhist works as Amitāyus, “Infinite Life.” In both East Asian and Tibetan Buddhist traditions he is often conflated with another buddha named “Infinite Life,” Aparimitāyus, or “Infinite Life and Wisdom,”Aparimitāyurjñāna, the shorter version of whose name has also been back-translated from Tibetan into Sanskrit as Amitāyus but who presides over a realm in the zenith. For details on the relation between these buddhas and their names, see The Aparimitāyurjñāna Sūtra (1) Toh 674, i.9.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 1.­16
  • 2.­5
  • 5.­69
  • 8.­9
  • 17.­17
  • g.­46
g.­21

Amra

Wylie:
  • a mra
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་མྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • amra AD

A yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­22

Amradhara

Wylie:
  • a mra ’chang
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་མྲ་འཆང་།
Sanskrit:
  • amradhara AD

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: a mra thogs pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­23

amṛta

Wylie:
  • bdud rtsi
Tibetan:
  • བདུད་རྩི།
Sanskrit:
  • amṛta AS

The nectar of immortality possessed by the devas, it is used as a metaphor for the teaching that brings liberation.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­76
  • 5.­68
  • 9.­23
  • 9.­26
  • 11.­2
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­20
  • 12.­53-54
  • 12.­59
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­8
  • 26.­6
  • n.­540
g.­24

Aṃśurāja

Wylie:
  • ’od snang rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྣང་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • aṃśurāja AD

A buddha.

(Toh 555: snang ba’i rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­25
g.­25

Anabhraka

Wylie:
  • sprin med
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anabhraka AD

“Cloudless.” In the Sarvāstivāda tradition, the lowest of the three paradises that correspond to the fourth dhyāna in the form realm. Translated in other texts as sprin dang bral ba.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­26

Ānanda

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A major śrāvaka disciple and personal attendant of the Buddha Śākyamuni during the last twenty-five years of his life. He was a cousin of the Buddha (according to the Mahāvastu, he was a son of Śuklodana, one of the brothers of King Śuddhodana, which means he was a brother of Devadatta; other sources say he was a son of Amṛtodana, another brother of King Śuddhodana, which means he would have been a brother of Aniruddha).

Ānanda, having always been in the Buddha’s presence, is said to have memorized all the teachings he heard and is celebrated for having recited all the Buddha’s teachings by memory at the first council of the Buddhist saṅgha, thus preserving the teachings after the Buddha’s parinirvāṇa. The phrase “Thus did I hear at one time,” found at the beginning of the sūtras, usually stands for his recitation of the teachings. He became a patriarch after the passing of Mahākāśyapa.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • i.­74
  • i.­89-90
  • 1.­2
  • 14.­1-3
  • 25.­49
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­11-12
  • 26.­15-16
  • 26.­20-21
  • 26.­83-84
  • n.­507
g.­27

Anāvaraṇa­dharma­cakra­varta

Wylie:
  • thogs pa med par chos kyi ’khor lo bskor ba
Tibetan:
  • ཐོགས་པ་མེད་པར་ཆོས་ཀྱི་འཁོར་ལོ་བསྐོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anāvaraṇa­dharma­cakra­varta AD

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­28

Anavatapta

Wylie:
  • ma dros pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་དྲོས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anavatapta AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A nāga king whose domain is Lake Anavatapta. According to Buddhist cosmology, this lake is located near Mount Sumeru and is the source of the four great rivers of Jambudvīpa. It is often identified with Lake Manasarovar at the foot of Mount Kailash in Tibet.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 14.­20
  • 22.­27
  • 22.­49
g.­29

Anikṣiptadhura

Wylie:
  • mi gtong brtson pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཏོང་བརྩོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anikṣiptadhura AD

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­30

Anikṣipta­mahā­praṇidhāna

Wylie:
  • smon lam chen po mi gtong ba
Tibetan:
  • སྨོན་ལམ་ཆེན་པོ་མི་གཏོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anikṣipta­mahā­praṇidhāna AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: smon lam chen po yongs su mi gcod pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­31

Annaharaṇa

Wylie:
  • zas ’phrog
Tibetan:
  • ཟས་འཕྲོག
Sanskrit:
  • annaharaṇa AD

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: zas kyi ril ming)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­32

Apramāṇābha

Wylie:
  • tshad med ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇābha AD

“Immeasurable Light.” The second highest of the three paradises that correspond to the second dhyāna in the form realm. Translated in other texts as tshad med snang ba.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­33

Apramāṇaśubha

Wylie:
  • tshad med dge
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་དགེ
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇaśubha AD

“Immeasurable Goodness.” The second highest of the three paradises that correspond to the third dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­34

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to Buddhist tradition, one who is worthy of worship (pūjām arhati), or one who has conquered the enemies, the mental afflictions (kleśa-ari-hata-vat), and reached liberation from the cycle of rebirth and suffering. It is the fourth and highest of the four fruits attainable by śrāvakas. Also used as an epithet of the Buddha.

Located in 38 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­29
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­81
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­118
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­36-38
  • 5.­40
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­79-81
  • 5.­84
  • 10.­40
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­28
  • 12.­63-64
  • 15.­116
  • 16.­2
  • 17.­2
  • 23.­2-4
  • 23.­13
  • 24.­1-2
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­50
  • g.­149
  • g.­265
  • g.­430
g.­35

artemisia

Wylie:
  • sha mya
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་མྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāmyaka AD

Careva arborea. Also known as mugwort and wormwood.

(Degé 557: sha myang. Toh 555: sha ma ka. Bagchi edition: śyābhyaka.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­36

ārya

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ārya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit ārya has the general meaning of a noble person, one of a higher class or caste. In Buddhist literature, depending on the context, it often means specifically one who has gained the realization of the path and is superior for that reason. In particular, it applies to stream enterers, once-returners, non-returners, and worthy ones (arhats) and is also used as an epithet of bodhisattvas. In the five-path system, it refers to someone who has achieved at least the path of seeing (darśanamārga).

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­57
  • 4.­11
  • 8.­5
  • 10.­14-15
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­30-32
  • 14.­7
  • 15.­95
  • 15.­99
  • 21.­9
  • n.­285
g.­37

Asaṃjñasattva

Wylie:
  • sems can ’du shes med pa
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་ཅན་འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṃjñasattva AD

“Beings without Perception.” A heavenly realm listed in this text between the twelfth heaven of the form realm, Bṛhatphala, and the five Pure Abodes of the form realm, known collectively as Śuddhāvāsa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­38

asaṃkhyeya eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa grangs med pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ་གྲངས་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṃkhyeyakalpa AS

The name of a certain kind of kalpa, literally meaning “incalculable.” The number of years in this kalpa differs in various sūtras that give a number. Also, twenty intermediate kalpas are said to be one asaṃkhyeya (incalculable) kalpa, and four incalculable kalpas are one great kalpa. In that case, those four incalculable kalpas represent the eons of the creation, presence, destruction, and absence of a world. Buddhas are often described as appearing in a second incalculable kalpa.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­44
  • 12.­15
  • 13.­13
  • 23.­13
g.­39

aspects of enlightenment

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhipakṣa AS

A set of qualities necessary as a method to attain the enlightenment of a śrāvaka, pratyekabuddha, or buddha. There are thirty-seven of these: (1–4) the four kinds of mindfulness: mindfulness of body, sensations, mind, and phenomena; (5–8) the four correct exertions: not to do bad actions that have not been done, to give up bad actions that are being done, to do good actions that have not been done, and to increase the good actions that are being done; (9–12) the foundations for miraculous powers: intention, diligence, mind, and analysis; (13–17) the five powers: faith, diligence, mindfulness, samādhi, and wisdom; (18–22) the five strengths: even stronger forms of faith, diligence, mindfulness, samādhi, and wisdom; (23–29) the seven limbs of enlightenment: correct mindfulness, correct wisdom of the analysis of phenomena, correct diligence, correct joy, correct serenity, correct samādhi, and correct equanimity; (30–37) the eightfold noble path: right view, examination, speech, action, livelihood, effort, mindfulness, and samādhi.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­93
  • 6.­51
g.­40

Aspiring to Always Turn the Dharma Wheel

Wylie:
  • rtag par chos kyi ’khor lo bskor bar sems bskyed
Tibetan:
  • རྟག་པར་ཆོས་ཀྱི་འཁོར་ལོ་བསྐོར་བར་སེམས་བསྐྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • satata­dharma­cakra­pravarta­cittotpada AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Dharma­cakra­pravarta­cittotpada; chos kyi ’khor lo yongs su bskor bar sems bskyed)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­41

asura

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A type of nonhuman being whose precise status is subject to different views, but is included as one of the six classes of beings in the sixfold classification of realms of rebirth. In the Buddhist context, asuras are powerful beings said to be dominated by envy, ambition, and hostility. They are also known in the pre-Buddhist and pre-Vedic mythologies of India and Iran, and feature prominently in Vedic and post-Vedic Brahmanical mythology, as well as in the Buddhist tradition. In these traditions, asuras are often described as being engaged in interminable conflict with the devas (gods).

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • i.­85
  • 1.­10-11
  • 1.­27
  • 1.­31
  • 2.­7-8
  • 3.­61
  • 5.­10
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­7
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­33
  • 12.­67
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­74
  • 15.­88
  • 15.­127
  • 21.­17
  • 22.­27
  • 22.­51-52
  • 29.­13
  • n.­152
  • n.­166
  • n.­393
  • g.­52
  • g.­234
  • g.­305
  • g.­334
  • g.­354
  • g.­402
  • g.­443
  • g.­505
g.­42

Aśvajit

Wylie:
  • rta thul
Tibetan:
  • རྟ་ཐུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvajit AD

One of the five companions with whom Siddhārtha Gautama practiced asceticism near the Nairañjanā River and who later heard the Buddha first teach the four noble truths at the Deer Park in Sarnath. He was renowned for his pure conduct and holy demeanor, so the Buddha sent him to attract Śāriputra and Maudgalyāyana to the order.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­43

Atapa

Wylie:
  • mi gdung ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གདུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • atapa AD

This is the fourth highest of the five Śuddhāvāsa paradises, the highest paradises in the form realm. In this sūtra it is the second highest. Here translated as meaning “Not Pained.” In other texts translated as ma dros pa (“Not Warm”).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • n.­133
g.­44

Aṭavika

Wylie:
  • ’brog gnas
Tibetan:
  • འབྲོག་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • aṭavika AD

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­42
g.­45

Aṭavīsaṃbhavā

Wylie:
  • ’brog khong khong na yod
Tibetan:
  • འབྲོག་ཁོང་ཁོང་ན་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṭavīsaṃbhavā AS

A lake in a wilderness.

(Toh 557: dgon pa na yod pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 25.­14
g.­46

Avalokiteśvara

Wylie:
  • kun tu spyan ras gzigs dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་སྤྱན་རས་གཟིགས་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • avalokiteśvara AS

First appeared as a bodhisattva beside Amitābha in the Sukhāvatīvyūha Sūtra ( The Display of the Pure Land of Sukhāvatī , Toh 115). The name has been variously interpreted. In its meaning as “the lord of avalokita,” avalokita has been interpreted as “seeing,” although, as a past passive participle, it is literally “lord of what has been seen.” One of the principal sūtras in the Mahāsāṃghika tradition was the Avalokita Sūtra, which has not been translated into Tibetan, in which the word is a synonym for enlightenment, as it is “that which has been seen” by the buddhas. In the early tantras, he was one of the lords of the three families, as the embodiment of the compassion of the Buddhas. The Potalaka Mountain in South India became important in Southern Indian Buddhism as his residence in this world, but Potalaka does not feature in the Kāraṇḍavyūha Sūtra ( The Basket’s Display , Toh 116), which is the most important sūtra dedicated to Avalokiteśvara.

(Toh 555: spyan ras gzigs)

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­75
  • 1.­4
  • 8.­30
  • 14.­6-7
  • n.­285
g.­47

Avalokiteśvarābhaya

Wylie:
  • spyan ras gzigs dbang mi ’jigs pa
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་རས་གཟིགས་དབང་མི་འཇིགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • avalokiteśvarābhaya AD

A buddha.

(Toh 555: rtog pa ’jigs med dbang phyug)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­27
g.­48

Avṛha

Wylie:
  • mi che ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • avṛha AD

In the Sarvāstivāda tradition, this is the lowest of the five Śuddhāvāsa paradises, the highest paradises in the form realm, and is said to be the most common rebirth for the “non-returners” of the Śrāvakayāna. In this sūtra it is the third highest.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • n.­133
g.­49

āyatana

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­26
  • 9.­20
  • 25.­25
g.­50

Āyurveda

Wylie:
  • tshe’i rig byed
Tibetan:
  • ཚེའི་རིག་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyurveda AS

The classical system of Indian medicine.

(Toh 555: shes pa)

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­3
  • 24.­6
  • 24.­22
  • 25.­1
  • n.­306
  • g.­55
  • g.­67
  • g.­90
  • g.­314
g.­51

Balendraketu

Wylie:
  • stobs kyi dbang po’i tog
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཀྱི་དབང་པོའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • balendraketu AD

A king in the distant past.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­82-83
  • 20.­3-4
  • g.­329
  • g.­381
g.­52

Bali

Wylie:
  • stobs chen
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • bali AD

An asura king. Indian literary sources describe how Bali wrested control of the world from the devas, establishing a period of peace and prosperity with no caste distinction. Indra requested Viṣṇu to use his wiles to gain back the world from him for the devas. Viṣṇu appeared as a dwarf asking for two steps of ground, was offered three, and then traversed the world in two steps. Bali, remaining faithful to his promise, accepted the banishment of the asuras into the underworld. A great Bali festival in his honor is held annually in South India.

(Toh 555: ba li)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 22.­51
  • g.­334
g.­53

bdellium

Wylie:
  • gu gul ra sa
Tibetan:
  • གུ་གུལ་ར་ས།
Sanskrit:
  • guggulurasa AS

Commiphora wighti, or Commiphora mukul. The resin, also known as guggul gum, is obtained from the bark of the tree. When burned, the smoke is said to drive away evil spirits

(Nobel edition: guggulu. Toh 555: gu gul.)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­73
  • 15.­6
  • 15.­12
g.­54

Beautiful to See

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A deva.

(Toh 555: mthong na dga’ ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­55

bezoar

Wylie:
  • gi’u wang
  • gi wang
Tibetan:
  • གིའུ་ཝང་།
  • གི་ཝང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gorocanā AS

Used in Āyurveda for both external and oral application in treating worm infestation, pruritus (itching), psychiatric disorders, low digestion strength, and more.

(Bagchi: samocaka)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­5
  • 15.­7
  • n.­307
g.­56

Bhadrika

Wylie:
  • bzang po
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrika AD

One of Siddhārtha’s five ascetic companions, who abandoned him when he renounced asceticism. When those five later became the Buddha’s first disciples, Bhadrika was the second of them to convert.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­57

Bhagavat

Wylie:
  • bcom ldan ’das
Tibetan:
  • བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhagavat AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Buddhist literature, this is an epithet applied to buddhas, most often to Śākyamuni. The Sanskrit term generally means “possessing fortune,” but in specifically Buddhist contexts it implies that a buddha is in possession of six auspicious qualities (bhaga) associated with complete awakening. The Tibetan term‍—where bcom is said to refer to “subduing” the four māras, ldan to “possessing” the great qualities of buddhahood, and ’das to “going beyond” saṃsāra and nirvāṇa‍—possibly reflects the commentarial tradition where the Sanskrit bhagavat is interpreted, in addition, as “one who destroys the four māras.” This is achieved either by reading bhagavat as bhagnavat (“one who broke”), or by tracing the word bhaga to the root √bhañj (“to break”).

Located in 299 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1-2
  • 1.­4-8
  • 1.­10-12
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­5-9
  • 2.­18-21
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­26-30
  • 2.­33-36
  • 2.­59
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­66-68
  • 2.­83
  • 2.­88
  • 2.­115
  • 2.­120-121
  • 3.­1-2
  • 3.­16
  • 3.­20
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­58
  • 3.­60-61
  • 3.­64
  • 3.­69-70
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­3-4
  • 4.­106-107
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3-6
  • 5.­8-10
  • 5.­27-28
  • 5.­42-45
  • 5.­47-48
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­55-56
  • 5.­58
  • 5.­68-69
  • 5.­73-75
  • 5.­77-79
  • 5.­86-90
  • 5.­93-95
  • 6.­2-3
  • 6.­91
  • 6.­95
  • 6.­99
  • 6.­103
  • 6.­107
  • 6.­111
  • 6.­115
  • 6.­119
  • 6.­123
  • 6.­127
  • 6.­129-130
  • 6.­134-136
  • 6.­140-141
  • 6.­147
  • 6.­149-150
  • 7.­2
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­42
  • 9.­1
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­5
  • 10.­7
  • 10.­9-10
  • 10.­16
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­37-38
  • 10.­40
  • 10.­43-44
  • 10.­51-53
  • 11.­1-13
  • 12.­2
  • 12.­6
  • 12.­8-9
  • 12.­12-15
  • 12.­22
  • 12.­26
  • 12.­28
  • 12.­30-33
  • 12.­52-66
  • 12.­70
  • 12.­72
  • 12.­76
  • 12.­85
  • 12.­89
  • 12.­93-94
  • 12.­97-98
  • 12.­100
  • 12.­106
  • 12.­122-123
  • 12.­125
  • 13.­2-4
  • 13.­6-7
  • 13.­13
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­4
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­10-11
  • 14.­13-14
  • 14.­16-17
  • 14.­19-21
  • 14.­23-26
  • 15.­1-2
  • 15.­15
  • 15.­22-23
  • 15.­42-45
  • 15.­91
  • 15.­96-97
  • 15.­99
  • 15.­117
  • 15.­128
  • 15.­133
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­5
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­6-7
  • 18.­1-2
  • 18.­5
  • 18.­7-13
  • 18.­15-16
  • 18.­19-20
  • 18.­22
  • 18.­25-26
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­4-9
  • 19.­16
  • 20.­1-3
  • 21.­2
  • 22.­1-2
  • 23.­1-2
  • 23.­4-6
  • 23.­12-14
  • 24.­1
  • 25.­45
  • 26.­3-8
  • 26.­10-16
  • 26.­18
  • 26.­20-21
  • 26.­86
  • 27.­1
  • 28.­1
  • 29.­1
  • 29.­12-13
g.­58

Bhaiṣajyadatta

Wylie:
  • sman sbyin
Tibetan:
  • སྨན་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhaiṣajyadatta AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sman gtong)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­59

Bhaiṣajyarāja

Wylie:
  • sman pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྨན་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhaiṣajyarāja AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sman gyi rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­60

bherī drum

Wylie:
  • rnga
Tibetan:
  • རྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • bherī AS

As specified in the Sanskrit, a conical or bowl-shaped kettledrum, with an upper surface that is beaten with sticks. The Tibetan and Chinese are not specific about the kind of drum it is.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • n.­84
  • n.­174
  • n.­195
g.­61

bhikṣu

Wylie:
  • dge slong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣu AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣu, often translated as “monk,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist monks and nuns‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity.

In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a monk follows 253 rules as part of his moral discipline. A nun (bhikṣuṇī; dge slong ma) follows 364 rules. A novice monk (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or nun (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma) follows thirty-six rules of moral discipline (although in other vinaya traditions novices typically follow only ten).

Located in 59 passages in the translation:

  • i.­35
  • i.­65
  • i.­72
  • i.­90
  • 1.­1
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­85
  • 6.­146
  • 10.­42-44
  • 11.­7-10
  • 11.­12-13
  • 12.­7-8
  • 12.­20
  • 12.­24
  • 12.­29-30
  • 12.­36
  • 12.­54
  • 12.­59
  • 12.­67-69
  • 12.­89
  • 12.­123
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­19
  • 15.­21
  • 16.­1
  • 18.­2
  • 18.­6
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­2
  • 19.­8
  • 21.­9
  • 21.­21
  • 21.­29
  • 25.­22
  • 26.­3
  • 26.­7-8
  • 26.­18-19
  • 26.­144
  • n.­232
  • n.­495
  • g.­167
  • g.­235
  • g.­300
  • g.­487
  • g.­512
g.­62

bhikṣuṇī

Wylie:
  • dge slong ma
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣuṇī AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣuṇī, often translated as “nun,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term bhikṣu (to which the female grammatical ending ṇī is added) literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist nuns and monks‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity. In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a bhikṣuṇī follows 364 rules and a bhikṣu follows 253 rules as part of their moral discipline.

For the first few years of the Buddha’s teachings in India, there was no ordination for women. It started at the persistent request and display of determination of Mahāprajāpatī, the Buddha’s stepmother and aunt, together with five hundred former wives of men of Kapilavastu, who had themselves become monks. Mahāprajāpatī is thus considered to be the founder of the nun’s order.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­85
  • 6.­146
  • 11.­12-13
  • 12.­7-8
  • 12.­20
  • 12.­29-30
  • 12.­54
  • 12.­59
  • 12.­67-69
  • 15.­21
  • 18.­6
  • g.­270
g.­63

Bhṛkuṭi

Wylie:
  • khro gnyer can
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་གཉེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhṛkuṭi AD

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: khro gnyer)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­64

bhūmi

Wylie:
  • sa
Tibetan:
  • ས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūmi AS

Literally the “grounds” in which qualities grow, and also meaning “levels.” Here it refers specifically to levels of enlightenment, especially the ten levels of the bodhisattvas.

Located in 89 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • i.­25
  • i.­40
  • i.­52-53
  • 3.­3
  • 3.­32
  • 3.­38
  • 3.­45-47
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­44
  • 4.­56
  • 6.­37-78
  • 6.­89
  • 6.­91-93
  • 6.­95-97
  • 6.­99-101
  • 6.­103-105
  • 6.­107-109
  • 6.­111-113
  • 6.­115-117
  • 6.­119-121
  • 6.­123-125
  • 6.­127-128
  • 6.­142
  • 6.­151
  • n.­102
g.­65

Bhūmikampa

Wylie:
  • sa g.yo byed
Tibetan:
  • ས་གཡོ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūmikampa AD

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: sa kun g.yo ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­66

bimba

Wylie:
  • bim pa
Tibetan:
  • བིམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bimbā AS
  • bimba AS

Momordica monadelpha. A perennial climbing plant, the fruit of which is a bright red gourd. Because of its color it is frequently used in poetry as a simile for lips.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­50
g.­67

black stone flower

Wylie:
  • rdo dreg lo ma
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་དྲེག་ལོ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • patraśaileya AS

Parmelia perlata. A lichen used as a spice and in Āyurveda for the treatment of skin diseases, cough, asthma, kidney stones, painful urination, and localized swelling. Commonly called śaileya in Sanskrit.

Emmerick, based on the Nobel edition, separates the compound into two: patra (leaf) and śaileya. Toh 555: spra ba.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­6
g.­68

blue jaybird

Wylie:
  • tsa sha
Tibetan:
  • ཙ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • cāṣa AD

More commonly known as the Indian roller (Coracias benghalensis).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­5
g.­69

Bodhimaṇḍa

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhimaṇḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The place where the Buddha Śākyamuni achieved awakening and where every buddha will manifest the attainment of buddhahood. In our world this is understood to be located under the Bodhi tree, the Vajrāsana, in present-day Bodhgaya, India. It can also refer to the state of awakening itself.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­68
  • 6.­36
  • 12.­36-38
  • 12.­41
g.­70

Bodhisattvasamuccayā

Wylie:
  • byang chub yang dag par bsdus pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཡང་དག་པར་བསྡུས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhi­sattva­samuccayā AS

A goddess. In Toh 555 called “goddess of the Bodhi tree.”

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­86-89
  • i.­93
  • 7.­2
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­6
  • 25.­45
  • 29.­1
  • 29.­13
g.­71

Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmā AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A high-ranking deity presiding over a divine world; he is also considered to be the lord of the Sahā world (our universe). Though not considered a creator god in Buddhism, Brahmā occupies an important place as one of two gods (the other being Indra/Śakra) said to have first exhorted the Buddha Śākyamuni to teach the Dharma. The particular heavens found in the form realm over which Brahmā rules are often some of the most sought-after realms of higher rebirth in Buddhist literature. Since there are many universes or world systems, there are also multiple Brahmās presiding over them. His most frequent epithets are “Lord of the Sahā World” (sahāṃpati) and Great Brahmā (mahābrahman).

Located in 46 passages in the translation:

  • i.­49
  • i.­63-64
  • i.­66
  • i.­75
  • 2.­7
  • 3.­64
  • 4.­12
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­85
  • 5.­87
  • 5.­89
  • 5.­93
  • 6.­46
  • 7.­4
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­39
  • 10.­51-52
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­61-63
  • 14.­13
  • 14.­24
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­100
  • 20.­7-8
  • 20.­11
  • 21.­33
  • 22.­26
  • 27.­4
  • 29.­12
  • n.­38
  • n.­131
  • g.­72
  • g.­73
  • g.­74
  • g.­75
  • g.­76
  • g.­256
  • g.­257
g.­72

Brahmā devas

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmā AS

In addition to being the name of the great deity, “Brahmā” (sometimes “Mahābrahmā”) can mean all the devas that live in Brahmā’s paradise.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­55
  • 1.­27
  • 6.­140
  • 12.­28
g.­73

Brahmakāyika

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika AD

“Brahmā’s Multitude.” The lowest of the three paradises that form the paradises of the first dhyāna in the form realm.

(Toh 555: tshangs ris)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 15.­120
  • n.­131
g.­74

Brahma­pariṣadya

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i rgyal ’khor
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་རྒྱལ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • brahma­pariṣadya AD

“Brahmā’s entourage.” In this sūtra the highest of the three paradises that correspond to the first dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 15.­120
  • n.­131
g.­75

Brahmapurohita

Wylie:
  • tshangs chen mdun ’don
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ཆེན་མདུན་འདོན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmapurohita AD

“Brahmā’s Principals.” In the generally established cosmology, the second highest of the three paradises that correspond to the first dhyāna in the form realm. Here it is the third highest with the addition of another Brahmā paradise.

(Toh 555: tshangs pa’i mdun na ’don pa)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 15.­120
g.­76

Brahmarāja

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmarāja AD

See “Brahmā.”

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­18
  • 10.­21-22
  • 10.­24-27
  • 10.­35
  • 10.­40
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­53
g.­77

brahmin

Wylie:
  • bram ze
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A member of the highest of the four castes in Indian society, which is closely associated with religious vocations.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • i.­37
  • i.­43
  • i.­47
  • i.­77
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­35-36
  • 2.­38
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­55
  • 2.­111
  • 3.­67
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­8
  • 4.­103
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­17
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­90-91
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­36
  • 15.­58
  • 15.­70
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­91
  • 15.­93
  • 15.­131-132
  • n.­62
  • n.­64
  • g.­232
  • g.­522
g.­78

branches of enlightenment

Wylie:
  • byang chub yan lag
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཡན་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • bodhyaṅga AD

The seven branches of enlightenment are mindfulness, analysis of phenomena, diligence, joy, tranquility, samādhi, and equanimity.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­11
  • 4.­46
g.­79

Bṛhatphala

Wylie:
  • ’bras bu che
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་བུ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhatphala AD

In the Sarvāstivāda tradition, the highest of the three paradises that correspond to the fourth dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • g.­37
g.­80

Buddhapālita

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas skyong
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • buddhapālita AD

A Licchavī youth.

(Toh 555: sangs rgyas skyabs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­81

caitya

Wylie:
  • mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • caitya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Tibetan translates both stūpa and caitya with the same word, mchod rten, meaning “basis” or “recipient” of “offerings” or “veneration.” Pali: cetiya.

A caitya, although often synonymous with stūpa, can also refer to any site, sanctuary or shrine that is made for veneration, and may or may not contain relics.

A stūpa, literally “heap” or “mound,” is a mounded or circular structure usually containing relics of the Buddha or the masters of the past. It is considered to be a sacred object representing the awakened mind of a buddha, but the symbolism of the stūpa is complex, and its design varies throughout the Buddhist world. Stūpas continue to be erected today as objects of veneration and merit making.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­57
g.­82

Cakravāḍa

Wylie:
  • khor yug
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ཡུག
Sanskrit:
  • cakravāḍa AS

“Circular Enclosure”; there are at least three interpretations of what this name refers to. In the Kṣitigarbha Sūtra it is a mountain that contains the hells. In that case, it is equivalent to the Vaḍaba submarine mountain of fire, also said to be the entrance to the hells. More commonly, it is the name of the outer ring of mountains at the edge of the flat disk that is the world, with Sumeru in the center. This is also equated with Vaḍaba, as it is the heat of the mountain range that evaporates the ocean so that it does not overflow. Jambudvīpa, the world of humans, is in this sea to Sumeru’s south. However, the term is also used to mean the entire disk, including Meru and the paradises above it. An alternate form is Cakravāla.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­33
  • g.­258
g.­83

cakravartin

Wylie:
  • khor los sgyur ba
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ideal monarch or emperor who, as the result of the merit accumulated in previous lifetimes, rules over a vast realm in accordance with the Dharma. Such a monarch is called a cakravartin because he bears a wheel (cakra) that rolls (vartate) across the earth, bringing all lands and kingdoms under his power. The cakravartin conquers his territory without causing harm, and his activity causes beings to enter the path of wholesome actions. According to Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa, just as with the buddhas, only one cakravartin appears in a world system at any given time. They are likewise endowed with the thirty-two major marks of a great being (mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa), but a cakravartin’s marks are outshined by those of a buddha. They possess seven precious objects: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the wish-fulfilling gem, the queen, the general, and the minister. An illustrative passage about the cakravartin and his possessions can be found in The Play in Full (Toh 95), 3.3–3.13.

Vasubandhu lists four types of cakravartins: (1) the cakravartin with a golden wheel (suvarṇacakravartin) rules over four continents and is invited by lesser kings to be their ruler; (2) the cakravartin with a silver wheel (rūpyacakravartin) rules over three continents and his opponents submit to him as he approaches; (3) the cakravartin with a copper wheel (tāmracakravartin) rules over two continents and his opponents submit themselves after preparing for battle; and (4) the cakravartin with an iron wheel (ayaścakravartin) rules over one continent and his opponents submit themselves after brandishing weapons.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • i.­84
  • 5.­82
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­45
  • 10.­49
  • 12.­27-28
  • 21.­3
  • 21.­6
  • 21.­32
  • g.­164
  • g.­413
  • g.­452
g.­84

camphor

Wylie:
  • ga bur
Tibetan:
  • ག་བུར།
Sanskrit:
  • karpūra AD

A substance derived from the wood of the Kapur tree (Dryobalanops aromatica) and also from the unrelated camphor laurel (Cinnamomum camphora).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­73
  • n.­255
g.­85

Caṇḍā

Wylie:
  • gdol pa mo
Tibetan:
  • གདོལ་པ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍā AS

A fierce goddess.

(Toh 555: ma rungs pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­86

caṇḍāla

Wylie:
  • gdol pa
Tibetan:
  • གདོལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍāla AS

The lowest and most disparaged class of people within the caste system of ancient India, they fall outside of the caste system altogether due to their low rank in society.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­18
g.­87

Caṇḍālikā

Wylie:
  • gtum mo
Tibetan:
  • གཏུམ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍālikā AS

A fierce goddess.

(Toh 555: gdug pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­88

Candana

Wylie:
  • tsan+dan
Tibetan:
  • ཙནྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • candana AD

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­89

Caṇḍikā

Wylie:
  • gtum mo
Tibetan:
  • གཏུམ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍikā AS

A fierce goddess.

(Toh 555: lag na dbyug thogs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­90

cardamom

Wylie:
  • sug smel
Tibetan:
  • སུག་སྨེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūkṣmelā AS

Elettria cardamomum. A digestive medicine in Āyurveda.

(Degé 557: smug smel. Toh 555: su ki ma le.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­91

Cāturmahā­rāja­kāyika

Wylie:
  • rgyal chen bzhi’i ris
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་ཆེན་བཞིའི་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • cāturmahā­rāja­kāyika AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the heavens of Buddhist cosmology, lowest among the six heavens of the desire realm (kāmadhātu, ’dod khams). Dwelling place of the Four Great Kings (caturmahārāja, rgyal chen bzhi), traditionally located on a terrace of Sumeru, just below the Heaven of the Thirty-Three. Each cardinal direction is ruled by one of the Four Great Kings and inhabited by a different class of nonhuman beings as their subjects: in the east, Dhṛtarāṣṭra rules the gandharvas; in the south, Virūḍhaka rules the kumbhāṇḍas; in the west, Virūpākṣa rules the nāgas; and in the north, Vaiśravaṇa rules the yakṣas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­18
  • 12.­33
g.­92

Chagalapāda

Wylie:
  • ra rkang
Tibetan:
  • ར་རྐང་།
Sanskrit:
  • chagalapāda AD

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­45
g.­93

chir pine rosin

Wylie:
  • shi ri bi sta
Tibetan:
  • ཤི་རི་བི་སྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • nīveṣṭaka AS
  • śrīveṣṭaka

This is a product of the chir pine, also known as the long leaf pine: Pinus roxbhurghii or Pinus longifolia. It is used in Āyurvedic medicine. Also known in Sanskrit as śrīveṣṭa, which appears to be the version in the manuscript from which the Tibetan was transliterated.

(Toh 555: thang chu.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­6
g.­94

cinnamon

Wylie:
  • shing tsha
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་ཚ།
Sanskrit:
  • tvaca AS

Cinnamonum tamale. Specifically, the Indian species of cinnamon, which has medicinal properties.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­95

Citrasena

Wylie:
  • sna tshogs sde
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་ཚོགས་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • citrasena AD

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­44
g.­96

Clear Insight

Wylie:
  • shes rab gsal
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A deva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­97

Completely Pure Moonlight Sign Renowned King

Wylie:
  • zla ’od rnam dag grags pa’i tog gi rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་འོད་རྣམ་དག་གྲགས་པའི་ཏོག་གི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555: rnam dag zla ba’i ’od zer mtshan grags rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­23
g.­98

Conch Shell

Wylie:
  • dung can
Tibetan:
  • དུང་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A fierce goddess.

(Toh 556 Degé: dung can. Toh 555: dung chen. Toh 555 Narthang: rung chen)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­99

confidence

Wylie:
  • mi ’jigs pa
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཇིགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśāradya AD

See the “four confidences.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­154
g.­100

Consumer of Burnt Offerings

Wylie:
  • bsreg bya za
Tibetan:
  • བསྲེག་བྱ་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Another name for Agni, the god of fire.

(Toh 557: sbyin sreg za)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­37
g.­101

contact

Wylie:
  • reg pa
Tibetan:
  • རེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sparśa AD

The sixth of the twelve links or phases of dependent origination, which is the contact between the sensory consciousnesses and organs with sensory objects.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­20
  • 25.­25
g.­102

costus root

Wylie:
  • ru rta
Tibetan:
  • རུ་རྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṣṭha AS

Saussurea lappa. This is a 3–4-foot-tall shrub. Alternatively identified as Saussurea costus and Costus speciosus.

(Bagchi edition: turuṣka)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­103

Courageous Established Intention

Wylie:
  • spobs pas bkod par dgongs pa
Tibetan:
  • སྤོབས་པས་བཀོད་པར་དགོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555: spobs rab dgongs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­22
g.­104

crepe ginger

Wylie:
  • dz+ha ma
Tibetan:
  • ཛྷ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vyāmaka AS

Cheilocostus speciosus. This rhizome is used in Āyurvedic medicine to treat fever, rash, asthma, bronchitis, and intestinal worms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­105

Curing Affliction

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs nad sel
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་ནད་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: nyon mongs pa’i nad rnam par sel ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­106

dammar gum

Wylie:
  • sra rtsi
Tibetan:
  • སྲ་རྩི།
Sanskrit:
  • sarjarasa AS

A resin from the tree known as sarjarasa, sarja, white dammar, or Indian copal tree (Vateria indica). The white dammar resin is used in incense and Āyurvedic medicine.

(Toh 555: sa rdza ra sa.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­6
g.­107

Daṇḍapāṇi

Wylie:
  • lag na be con
Tibetan:
  • ལག་ན་བེ་ཅོན།
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍapāṇi AD

This is the Śākya Daṇḍapāṇi who, in the Lalitavistara Sūtra (The Play in Full), is described as the father of Gopā, the Buddha’s wife. There are others of that name, such as the brother of the Buddha’s mother, Māyā, and also the uncle of the Buddha’s other wife, Yaśodharā. However, that Daṇḍapāṇi was a member of the neighboring Koliya clan. There is also a contrasting account of a Śākya Daṇḍapāṇi who is said to have been a follower of Devadatta and who was dissatisfied by the Buddha’s answers when he met him in Kapilavastu, the capital of the Śākya clan. His nickname, “Cane Holder,” is said to be because he always carried a golden cane.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 25.­45
  • g.­172
g.­108

defilements

Wylie:
  • zag pa
Tibetan:
  • ཟག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āśrava AD
  • āsrava AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “to flow” or “to ooze.” Mental defilements or contaminations that “flow out” toward the objects of cyclic existence, binding us to them. Vasubandhu offers two alternative explanations of this term: “They cause beings to remain (āsayanti) within saṃsāra” and “They flow from the Summit of Existence down to the Avīci hell, out of the six wounds that are the sense fields” (Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya 5.40; Pradhan 1967, p. 308). The Summit of Existence (bhavāgra, srid pa’i rtse mo) is the highest point within saṃsāra, while the hell called Avīci (mnar med) is the lowest; the six sense fields (āyatana, skye mched) here refer to the five sense faculties plus the mind, i.e., the six internal sense fields.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 5.­40
  • 5.­80
  • 12.­125
  • 15.­97
  • g.­154
  • g.­464
  • g.­469
g.­109

dependent

Wylie:
  • gzhan dbang
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • paratantra AD

This refers to the dependent nature of phenomena. One of the three natures that are a central philosophy of the Yogācāra tradition.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­20
  • 18.­9
g.­110

dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel par ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་པར་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratītyasamutpāda AS

See “twelve phases of dependent origination.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 6.­26
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­50
  • g.­101
  • g.­426
g.­111

deva

Wylie:
  • lha
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • deva AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the most general sense the devas‍—the term is cognate with the English divine‍—are a class of celestial beings who frequently appear in Buddhist texts, often at the head of the assemblies of nonhuman beings who attend and celebrate the teachings of the Buddha Śākyamuni and other buddhas and bodhisattvas. In Buddhist cosmology the devas occupy the highest of the five or six “destinies” (gati) of saṃsāra among which beings take rebirth. The devas reside in the devalokas, “heavens” that traditionally number between twenty-six and twenty-eight and are divided between the desire realm (kāmadhātu), form realm (rūpadhātu), and formless realm (ārūpyadhātu). A being attains rebirth among the devas either through meritorious deeds (in the desire realm) or the attainment of subtle meditative states (in the form and formless realms). While rebirth among the devas is considered favorable, it is ultimately a transitory state from which beings will fall when the conditions that lead to rebirth there are exhausted. Thus, rebirth in the god realms is regarded as a diversion from the spiritual path.

Located in 181 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • i.­67
  • i.­83-87
  • i.­89
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­6
  • 1.­10-11
  • 1.­19
  • 1.­27
  • 1.­31
  • 2.­7-8
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­67
  • 3.­61
  • 3.­64
  • 3.­68
  • 4.­17
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­6
  • 5.­18-21
  • 5.­36-38
  • 5.­45
  • 5.­48
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­78-82
  • 5.­86
  • 6.­145
  • 7.­11
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­15
  • 10.­39-41
  • 10.­51-52
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­4
  • 11.­14
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­7-8
  • 12.­19
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­29-30
  • 12.­32-33
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­56-58
  • 12.­61
  • 12.­63
  • 12.­67
  • 12.­76
  • 12.­82
  • 12.­117
  • 12.­120
  • 14.­14
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­20
  • 15.­27
  • 15.­41
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­69-70
  • 15.­74
  • 15.­83
  • 15.­88
  • 15.­102
  • 15.­122-127
  • 15.­129
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­3
  • 18.­11
  • 18.­13-16
  • 19.­8
  • 20.­6-10
  • 20.­14-16
  • 20.­19-20
  • 20.­23
  • 20.­29-31
  • 20.­33
  • 20.­53
  • 20.­56-57
  • 20.­60
  • 20.­64
  • 20.­68
  • 20.­70-71
  • 20.­73
  • 20.­79
  • 21.­14
  • 21.­17-18
  • 21.­20
  • 21.­31
  • 22.­10
  • 22.­20
  • 22.­28-29
  • 22.­35
  • 22.­64
  • 22.­66
  • 22.­74
  • 23.­1-2
  • 23.­4
  • 23.­6
  • 23.­13-14
  • 23.­16-18
  • 24.­1
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­28-30
  • 25.­43
  • 25.­50
  • 26.­45
  • 26.­147
  • 27.­10
  • 29.­10
  • 29.­13
  • n.­38
  • n.­324
  • n.­411-412
  • n.­426
  • g.­14
  • g.­23
  • g.­52
  • g.­54
  • g.­72
  • g.­96
  • g.­112
  • g.­208
  • g.­286
  • g.­295
  • g.­322
  • g.­334
  • g.­336
  • g.­374
  • g.­451
g.­112

devī

Wylie:
  • lha mo
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • devī AS

A female being in the paradises from the base of Mount Sumeru upward. Also can refer to a female deity or goddess in the human world. See also “deva.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­20
  • n.­375
g.­113

dhāraṇī

Wylie:
  • gzungs
  • gzungs sngags
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས།
  • གཟུངས་སྔགས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhāraṇī AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term dhāraṇī has the sense of something that “holds” or “retains,” and so it can refer to the special capacity of practitioners to memorize and recall detailed teachings. It can also refer to a verbal expression of the teachings‍—an incantation, spell, or mnemonic formula‍—that distills and “holds” essential points of the Dharma and is used by practitioners to attain mundane and supramundane goals. The same term is also used to denote texts that contain such formulas.

Located in 72 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • i.­49
  • i.­53
  • i.­55
  • i.­58
  • i.­72
  • i.­75
  • 6.­89
  • 6.­91-93
  • 6.­95-97
  • 6.­99-101
  • 6.­103-105
  • 6.­107-109
  • 6.­111-113
  • 6.­115-117
  • 6.­119-121
  • 6.­123-125
  • 6.­127-129
  • 6.­144-145
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­40
  • 8.­42-43
  • 8.­45
  • 8.­47
  • 9.­1
  • 12.­70
  • 13.­3-4
  • 13.­6-9
  • 13.­11-15
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­14
  • 14.­25
  • 14.­27
  • 15.­38
  • 15.­41
  • 15.­44
  • 18.­16
  • 18.­25
  • 19.­9
  • n.­282
  • g.­376
g.­114

Dharaṇīśvararāja

Wylie:
  • gzungs kyi dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharaṇīśvararāja AD

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­115

Dharma body

Wylie:
  • chos kyi sku
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་སྐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmakāya AS

In its earliest use it generally meant that though the corporeal body of the Buddha had perished, his “body of the Dharma” continued. It also referred to the Buddha’s realization of reality, to his qualities as a whole, or to his teachings as embodying him. It later came to be synonymous with enlightenment or buddhahood, a “body” that can only be “seen” by a buddha.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • i.­25
  • i.­40
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­75
  • 2.­85
  • 2.­92
  • 2.­104
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­5-6
  • 3.­15-17
  • 3.­19
  • 3.­21-24
  • 3.­28-29
  • 3.­34-35
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­42
  • 3.­48-49
  • 3.­52-53
  • 6.­57
  • 9.­27
  • 21.­4
  • 21.­34
  • 26.­39
  • g.­468
g.­116

Dharma realm

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbyings
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབྱིངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhātu AS

A synonym for the ultimate nature of reality. The term is interpreted variously and can be translated according to context as “Dharma realm,” “Dharma element,” “the realm of phenomena,” or “the element of phenomena.”

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • i.­62
  • 1.­1
  • 2.­62
  • 3.­51
  • 3.­57
  • 6.­139
  • 10.­8-15
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­36
  • 22.­8
  • 22.­33
g.­117

dharmabhāṇaka

Wylie:
  • chos smra ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྨྲ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmabhāṇaka AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Speaker or reciter of scriptures. In early Buddhism a section of the saṅgha would consist of bhāṇakas, who, particularly before the teachings were written down and were only transmitted orally, were a key factor in the preservation of the teachings. Various groups of dharmabhāṇakas specialized in memorizing and reciting a certain set of sūtras or vinaya.

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • i.­80
  • i.­84
  • 11.­8-9
  • 12.­24-26
  • 12.­28
  • 12.­30
  • 12.­35-36
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­123
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­3
  • 15.­19
  • 16.­1
  • 18.­2
  • 18.­6
  • 18.­11
  • 18.­15
  • 18.­26
  • 19.­2
  • 19.­8
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­9
  • 21.­11-12
  • 21.­19
  • 21.­21
  • 21.­29
  • 22.­15
  • 22.­18
  • g.­372
g.­118

Dharmadatta

Wylie:
  • chos sbyin
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadatta AD

A Licchavī youth.

(Toh 555: chos byin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­119

Dharmadhvaja

Wylie:
  • chos kyi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhvaja AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­120

Dharmapāla

Wylie:
  • chos skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmapāla AD

A Licchavī youth.

(Toh 555: chos skyabs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­121

Dharmodgata

Wylie:
  • chos ’phags
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmodgata AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A great bodhisattva, residing in a divine city called Gandhavatī, who teaches the Prajñāpāramitā three times a day. He is known for becoming the teacher of the bodhisattva Sadāprarudita, who decides to sell his flesh and blood in order to make offerings to him and receive his teachings. This story is told in The Perfection of Wisdom in Eighteen Thousand Lines (Toh 10, ch. 85–86). It can also be found quoted in several works, such as The Words of My Perfect Teacher (kun bzang bla ma’i zhal lung) by Patrul Rinpoche.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­24
g.­122

dhātu

Wylie:
  • khams
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhātu AD

One way of describing experience and the world in terms of eighteen elements (eye and form, ear and sound, nose and smell, tongue and taste, body and physical objects, and mind and mental phenomena, to which the six consciousnesses are added). Also refers here to the four elements of earth, water, fire, and wind.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­26
g.­123

Dhṛtarāṣṭra

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor srung
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhṛtarāṣṭra AS

One of the Four Mahārājas, he is the guardian deity for the east and lord of the gandharvas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­1
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­22
  • 14.­17
g.­124

dhyāna

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Dhyāna is defined as one-pointed abiding in an undistracted state of mind, free from afflicted mental states. Four states of dhyāna are identified as being conducive to birth within the form realm. In the context of the Mahāyāna, it is the fifth of the six perfections. It is commonly translated as “concentration,” “meditative concentration,” and so on.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 6.­24
  • g.­1
  • g.­25
  • g.­32
  • g.­33
  • g.­73
  • g.­74
  • g.­75
  • g.­79
  • g.­151
  • g.­202
  • g.­256
  • g.­325
  • g.­326
  • g.­347
  • g.­433
g.­125

Difficult to Conquer King of Radiance

Wylie:
  • rgyal bar dka’ ba’i ’od kyi rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བར་དཀའ་བའི་འོད་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • durjayaprabharāja AD

The name of an eon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­44
  • g.­235
g.­126

Dravidian

Wylie:
  • drA bi Da
Tibetan:
  • དྲཱ་བི་ཌ།
Sanskrit:
  • drāviḍa AD

A designation used for a group of languages spoken in the south of India, including Telugu, Kannada, Malayalam, and Tamil.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­75
  • 14.­4
  • 14.­6
  • 14.­24
g.­127

Dṛḍhā

Wylie:
  • brtan ma
Tibetan:
  • བརྟན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • dṛḍhā AD

The goddess of the earth.

(Toh 555: sra ba)

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­80
  • i.­82
  • 1.­26
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 18.­1-2
  • 18.­7-8
  • 18.­13
  • 18.­15-16
  • 18.­26-27
  • 20.­1
g.­128

Dundubhisvara

Wylie:
  • rnga sgra
Tibetan:
  • རྔ་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • dundubhisvara AD

The principal buddha of the northern direction.

(Toh 555: rnga sgra skyabs)

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 1.­16
  • 2.­5
  • 8.­10
  • 17.­18
g.­129

eight liberations

Wylie:
  • rnam par grol ba brgyad
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གྲོལ་བ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭavimokṣa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A series of progressively more subtle states of meditative realization or attainment. There are several presentations of these found in the canonical literature. One of the most common is as follows: (1) One observes form while the mind dwells at the level of the form realm. (2) One observes forms externally while discerning formlessness internally. (3) One dwells in the direct experience of the body’s pleasant aspect. (4) One dwells in the realization of the sphere of infinite space by transcending all conceptions of matter, resistance, and diversity. (5) Transcending the sphere of infinite space, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of infinite consciousness. (6) Transcending the sphere of infinite consciousness, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of nothingness. (7) Transcending the sphere of nothingness, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception. (8) Transcending the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception, one dwells in the realization of the cessation of conception and feeling.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­1
g.­130

eight unfavorable states

Wylie:
  • mi khom pa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཁོམ་པ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭākṣaṇa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A set of circumstances that do not provide the freedom to practice the Buddhist path: being born in the realms of (1) the hells, (2) hungry ghosts (pretas), (3) animals, or (4) long-lived gods, or in the human realm among (5) barbarians or (6) extremists, (7) in places where the Buddhist teachings do not exist, or (8) without adequate faculties to understand the teachings where they do exist.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­119
g.­131

eight vows

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • poṣadha AD

The eight vows taken by a layperson for just one day, usually a full-moon or new-moon day: no killing, no stealing, celibacy, no lying, no intoxicants, no sitting on a high chair, no singing or dancing, no wearing of adornments or perfumes.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­85
  • 17.­30
g.­132

eighteen unique qualities of a buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas gyi chos ma ’dres pa
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་གྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āveṇika­buddha­dharma AD

There are eighteen such qualities unique to a buddha, which consist of the ten strengths, the four fearlessnesses, three mindfulnesses, and great compassion.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­54
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­36
  • g.­204
g.­133

eighty features

Wylie:
  • dpe byad bzang po brgyad cu
Tibetan:
  • དཔེ་བྱད་བཟང་པོ་བརྒྱད་ཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśītyanuvyañjana AS

A set of eighty bodily characteristics borne by buddhas and universal emperors. They are considered “minor” in terms of being secondary to the thirty-two major marks of a great being. These can be found listed, for example, in Prajñāpāramitā sūtras (see Toh 9, Toh 10, Toh 11) or in The Play in Full (Toh 95, 7.100) and many other sūtras.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­4
  • 4.­74
  • g.­467
g.­134

Elapatra

Wylie:
  • e la’i ’dab ma
Tibetan:
  • ཨེ་ལའི་འདབ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • elapatra AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A nāga king often present in the retinue of the Buddha Śākyamuni. According to the Vinaya, in the time of the Buddha Kāśyapa he had been a monk (bhikṣu) who angrily cut down a thorny bush at the entrance of his cave because it always snagged his robes. Cutting down bushes or even grass is contrary to the monastic rules and he did not confess his action. Therefore, he was reborn as a nāga with a tree growing out of his head, which caused him great pain whenever the wind blew. This tale is found represented in ancient sculpture and is often quoted to demonstrate how small misdeeds can lead to great consequences. See, e.g., Patrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Perfect Teacher.

In this text:

(Toh 555: ela’i lo ma)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7
  • 22.­49
g.­135

emanation body

Wylie:
  • sprul pa’i sku
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲུལ་པའི་སྐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇakāya AS
  • nirmitakāya AS

Manifestations of the Buddha, particularly as the principal buddha of an age, that are perceivable by ordinary beings.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 2.­60
  • 3.­2-3
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­23-24
  • 3.­26
  • 3.­30-34
  • 3.­52
  • g.­468
g.­136

enjoyment body

Wylie:
  • long spyod rdzogs pa’i sku
Tibetan:
  • ལོང་སྤྱོད་རྫོགས་པའི་སྐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃbhogakāya AD

The enjoyment body denotes the luminous, immaterial, and unimpeded reflection-like forms that become spontaneously present and naturally manifest to tenth level bodhisattvas.

Degé 557: sha mi.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­23-24
  • 3.­27
  • 3.­30-34
  • 3.­52
  • g.­468
g.­137

eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A cosmic period of time, sometimes equivalent to the time when a world system appears, exists, and disappears. According to the traditional Abhidharma understanding of cyclical time, a great eon (mahākalpa) is divided into eighty lesser eons. In the course of one great eon, the universe takes form and later disappears. During the first twenty of the lesser eons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion; during the next twenty it remains; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction; and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of empty stasis. A fortunate, or good, eon (bhadrakalpa) refers to any eon in which more than one buddha appears.

Located in 57 passages in the translation:

  • i.­80-81
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­29
  • 1.­31
  • 2.­2
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­23
  • 3.­58
  • 4.­13
  • 4.­40
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­48
  • 4.­72-73
  • 4.­76
  • 4.­95
  • 4.­102
  • 5.­32
  • 5.­79
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­24
  • 7.­26
  • 7.­31
  • 7.­36
  • 9.­27
  • 9.­34
  • 10.­43-44
  • 10.­46
  • 12.­27-28
  • 12.­63
  • 13.­11
  • 15.­96
  • 16.­1
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­8
  • 21.­4-5
  • 21.­32-33
  • 22.­10
  • 23.­2
  • 23.­12
  • 24.­1
  • 26.­85
  • 26.­87
  • 26.­146
  • 27.­10
  • n.­210
  • n.­238
  • n.­281
  • g.­38
  • g.­125
  • g.­235
g.­138

Equally Seeing

Wylie:
  • mnyam par gzigs
Tibetan:
  • མཉམ་པར་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­18
g.­139

Essence of Illustrious Precious Radiance

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i ’od dpal gyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་འོད་དཔལ་གྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Name of the future buddha whom the goddess Ratnārcī is prophesied to become.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­64
  • 10.­40
g.­140

Essence of Lotus Radiance

Wylie:
  • pad+mo’i ’od kyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • པདྨོའི་འོད་ཀྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: pad ma ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­141

Essence of the Radiance of a Hundred Golden Lights

Wylie:
  • gser brgya’i ’od zer du snang ba’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་བརྒྱའི་འོད་ཟེར་གསེར་དུ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha in the distant future who is Rūpyaprabha, the son of the bodhisattva Ruciraketu in the time of Śākyamuni.

(Toh 555: Suvarṇaketuprabha; gser tog ’od)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • 23.­4
g.­142

Exalted Light Rays

Wylie:
  • ’od zer mtho ba
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་མཐོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­143

Excellent Lotus

Wylie:
  • pad+ma dam pa
Tibetan:
  • པདྨ་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555: Padmavijaya; rnam par rgyal ba’i pad ma)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­17
g.­144

Extremely Pure Intelligence

Wylie:
  • shin tu rnam dag blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རྣམ་དག་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Viśuddhaprajñā; shes rab rnam par dag pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­145

Extremely Radiant Array

Wylie:
  • shin tu ’od bkod
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་འོད་བཀོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: ’od rgyan chen po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­146

fenugreek

Wylie:
  • spr-i ka
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲྀ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • spṛkā AS

Trigonella corniculata.

(Toh 555 has spri ka spo. Toh 557 translates as ’u su.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­147

fig tree flower

Wylie:
  • u dum bA ra
Tibetan:
  • ཨུ་དུམ་བཱ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • udumbara AD

The mythological flower of the fig tree, said to appear on rare occasions, such as the birth of a buddha. The actual fig tree flower is contained within the fruit.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­23
  • 29.­3
g.­148

Firm Effort

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus brtan
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས་བརྟན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Viryatapas; brtson ’grus dka’ thub)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­149

five actions with immediate result upon death

Wylie:
  • mtshams med pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • མཚམས་མེད་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcānantarya AD

The five actions that lead to going instantly to hell upon death: killing one’s father; killing one’s mother; killing an arhat; splitting the sangha; and wounding a buddha so that he bleeds.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 15.­116
g.­150

five degenerations

Wylie:
  • snyigs ma rnam pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྙིགས་མ་རྣམ་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcakaṣāya AD

The five degenerations are (1) the degeneration of life span, (2) the degeneration of views, (3) the degeneration of the afflictions, (4) the degeneration of beings, and (5) the degeneration of the era.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­19
  • 5.­2
  • 10.­18-19
g.­151

five kinds of obscurations

Wylie:
  • sgrib pa rnam pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲིབ་པ་རྣམ་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcanīvaraṇa

Five impediments to meditation (bsam gtan, dhyāna): sensory desire (’dod pa la ’dun pa, kāmacchanda), ill will (gnod sems, vyāpāda), drowsiness and torpor (rmugs pa dang gnyid, styāna and middha), agitation and regret (rgod pa dang ’gyod pa, auddhatya and kaukṛtya), and doubt (the tshom, vicikitsā).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­92
  • 6.­96
  • 6.­100
  • 6.­104
  • 6.­108
  • 6.­112
  • 6.­116
  • 6.­120
  • 6.­124
  • 6.­128
g.­152

five skandhas

Wylie:
  • phung po lnga
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaskandha

The five skandhas, or aggregates, are form, feeling, perception, formation, and consciousness. On the individual level the five aggregates refer to the basis upon which the mistaken idea of a self is projected.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­62
  • 6.­26
  • 9.­22
  • 10.­10-12
  • 10.­14
  • g.­153
  • g.­412
g.­153

formation

Wylie:
  • ’du byed
Tibetan:
  • འདུ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃskāra AS

The meaning of this term varies according to context. As one of the skandhas it refers to various mental activities. In terms of the twelve phases of dependent origination it is the second, “formation” or “creation,” referring to activities with karmic results.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­20
  • 25.­25-26
  • g.­152
g.­154

four confidences

Wylie:
  • mi ’jigs pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཇིགས་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturvaiśāradya

This refers to the four confidences or fearlessnesses (as translated into Tibetan) of a buddha: full confidence that (1) they are fully awakened; (2) they have removed all defilements; (3) they have taught about the obstacles to liberation; and (4) they have shown the path to liberation.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­54
  • g.­99
g.­155

four discernments

Wylie:
  • so so yang dag par rig pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • སོ་སོ་ཡང་དག་པར་རིག་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catuḥpratisaṃvid AD

The discernments of meaning, phenomena, language, and eloquence.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­40
  • 5.­54
g.­156

four kinds of physical actions

Wylie:
  • spyod lam rnam pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱོད་ལམ་རྣམ་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturvidham īryāpatham AD

Walking, standing, sitting, and lying down.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­60
  • n.­107
g.­157

Four Mahārājas

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturmahārāja AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Four gods who live on the lower slopes (fourth level) of Mount Meru in the eponymous Heaven of the Four Great Kings (Cāturmahā­rājika, rgyal chen bzhi’i ris) and guard the four cardinal directions. Each is the leader of a nonhuman class of beings living in his realm. They are Dhṛtarāṣṭra, ruling the gandharvas in the east; Virūḍhaka, ruling over the kumbhāṇḍas in the south; Virūpākṣa, ruling the nāgas in the west; and Vaiśravaṇa (also known as Kubera) ruling the yakṣas in the north. Also referred to as Guardians of the World or World Protectors (lokapāla, ’jig rten skyong ba).

Located in 59 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­69-70
  • i.­75
  • 3.­64
  • 5.­93
  • 10.­51-52
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­5-8
  • 11.­11-14
  • 12.­2
  • 12.­5-9
  • 12.­14-15
  • 12.­18-20
  • 12.­26
  • 12.­29-31
  • 12.­33
  • 12.­52-55
  • 12.­58-59
  • 12.­63
  • 12.­66
  • 12.­68
  • 12.­99
  • 12.­106
  • 12.­122-123
  • 12.­126
  • 14.­19
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­97
  • 15.­101
  • 15.­123
  • 22.­35
  • n.­251
  • g.­123
  • g.­489
  • g.­517
  • g.­518
g.­158

fourfold army

Wylie:
  • dpung gi tshogs yan lag bzhi
Tibetan:
  • དཔུང་གི་ཚོགས་ཡན་ལག་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturaṅgabalakāya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient Indian army was composed of four branches (caturaṅga)‍—infantry, cavalry, chariots, and elephants.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­12
  • 12.­14
g.­159

frankincense

Wylie:
  • sa la ki
  • du ru ska
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལ་ཀི
  • དུ་རུ་སྐ།
Sanskrit:
  • śallaki AS

Also known as olibanum, this is a resin from trees of the genus Boswellia, in this case, Boswellia serrata, “Indian frankincense.” It is also known as salai and śallakī, tilakalka, vṛścika, and turuṣka.

(Bagchi edition: sihlaka. Toh 555: sa la ki.)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­73
  • 15.­6
g.­160

Gandhamādana

Wylie:
  • spos kyi ngad ldang ba
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་ངད་ལྡང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhamādana AS

A mountain north of the Himalayas, said to be fifty yojanas from Mount Kailash. In other sūtras, it is translated as spos ngad can, spos ngad ldang, or spos nad ldan. Mount Gandhamardan in Orissa, India, was at one time a center for Buddhist study and practice.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­54
  • g.­322
g.­161

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • 2.­8
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­33
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­83
  • 15.­127
  • 20.­18
  • 29.­13
  • n.­39
  • g.­123
  • g.­322
g.­162

Gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva AD

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­44
g.­163

Ganeśa

Wylie:
  • tshogs bdag
Tibetan:
  • ཚོགས་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • ganeśa AD

The elephant-headed deity, more popularly known as Ganesh and associated with overcoming obstacles. The son of Śiva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­103
g.­164

Gaṅgadevī

Wylie:
  • gang gA’i lha mo
Tibetan:
  • གང་གཱའི་ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgadevī AD

A female disciple of the Tathāgata Great Mass of Light who became a cakravartin king eighty-four thousand times and eventually the Tathāgata Ratnārci.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­46
  • 5.­82
g.­165

Ganges

Wylie:
  • gang gA
Tibetan:
  • གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­5
  • 2.­42
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­40
  • 5.­52
  • 6.­91
  • 6.­95
  • 6.­99
  • 6.­103
  • 6.­107
  • 6.­111
  • 6.­115
  • 6.­119
  • 6.­123
  • 6.­127
  • 12.­34-36
  • 22.­7
  • g.­248
  • g.­321
  • g.­322
g.­166

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­9
  • 1.­11
  • 1.­27
  • 2.­8
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­33
  • 22.­27
  • n.­39
  • g.­331
g.­167

Gayākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ga yA ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ག་ཡཱ་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gayākāśyapa AD

The brother of Nadīkāśyapa and Uruvilva­kāśyapa. A practitioner of fire offering at Uruvilva (Bodhgayā), he and his two hundred students were converted to becoming bhikṣus of the Buddha. He and his brothers and their students were the third group to become followers of the Buddha after his enlightenment.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­300
  • g.­487
g.­168

Goddess Śrī

Wylie:
  • dpal gyi lha mo
  • lha mo dpal
  • dpal
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་གྱི་ལྷ་མོ།
  • ལྷ་མོ་དཔལ།
  • དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śrī

The great goddess Śrī, better known as Lakṣmī, who promises to aid those who recite this sūtra and to ensure its preservation so that beings will have good fortune. She dwells in a palace in the paradise of Alakāvati.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­78-79
  • i.­85
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­85
  • 12.­88
  • 15.­103
  • 16.­1-2
  • 16.­4-6
  • 17.­1-3
  • 17.­32-34
  • 22.­1
  • 22.­35
  • 22.­56
  • 29.­13
  • n.­373
  • n.­375
  • n.­379
  • g.­318
  • g.­319
  • g.­345
g.­169

Golden City Mountain

Wylie:
  • gser gyi grong khyer ri bo
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར་རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­44
g.­170

Golden Essence

Wylie:
  • gser gyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: gser mdzod)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­22
g.­171

Golden Face

Wylie:
  • gser gdong
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གདོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A nāga king.

(Toh 555: gser gyi bzhin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­172

Gopā

Wylie:
  • sa ’tsho ma
Tibetan:
  • ས་འཚོ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gopā AS

A wife of the Buddha Śākyamuni when he was Prince Siddhārtha, and the daughter of Daṇḍapāṇi.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 25.­48
  • g.­107
g.­173

gopi

Wylie:
  • phyugs rdzi
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱུགས་རྫི།
Sanskrit:
  • gopī AD

Female cow herders or milk maids, the gopis are well known from their role in the mythology of Kṛṣṇa, in particular, Rādhā, who became his lover.

(Toh 555: rdzi’i bu mo)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­69
g.­174

Great Cloud Clearing Darkness

Wylie:
  • sprin chen mun sel
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་མུན་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen mun pa rnam par sel ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­175

Great Cloud Clearing Obscured Vision

Wylie:
  • sprin chen rab rib sel ba
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་རབ་རིབ་སེལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen lta ba’i rab rib rnam par sel ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­176

Great Cloud Completely Pure Radiance

Wylie:
  • sprin chen rnam dag ’od
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་རྣམ་དག་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen ’od gtsang)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­177

Great Cloud Constant Wisdom Rain

Wylie:
  • sprin chen shes rab kun du ’char
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་ཤེས་རབ་ཀུན་དུ་འཆར།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Mahā­megha­prajñā­samavarṣa; sprin chen shes rab char yongs su snyoms pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­178

Great Cloud Dharma Holder

Wylie:
  • sprin chen chos ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་ཆོས་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen chos skyong)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­179

Great Cloud Firelight

Wylie:
  • sprin chen me’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་མེའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­180

Great Cloud Flower Tree King

Wylie:
  • sprin chen me tog shing rgyal
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་མེ་ཏོག་ཤིང་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen me tog sdong po’i rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­181

Great Cloud Good Fortune

Wylie:
  • sprin chen bkra shis
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་བཀྲ་ཤིས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­182

Great Cloud King Completely Pure Rain

Wylie:
  • sprin chen rnam dag char pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་རྣམ་དག་ཆར་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen char gyi rgyal po yongs su dag pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­183

Great Cloud Lightning

Wylie:
  • sprin chen glog gi ’od
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་གློག་གི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­184

Great Cloud Lion’s Roar

Wylie:
  • sprin chen seng ge’i sgra
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་སེང་གེའི་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­185

Great Cloud Moon’s Essence

Wylie:
  • sprin chen zla ba’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་ཟླ་བའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­186

Great Cloud Precious Glory

Wylie:
  • sprin chen rin chen dpal
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་རིན་ཆེན་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Mahā­megha­ratna­guṇa; sprin chen rin chen yon tan)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­187

Great Cloud Renowned Joy

Wylie:
  • sprin chen grags dga’
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་གྲགས་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen grags can dga’)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­188

Great Cloud Renowned Limitless Revealer

Wylie:
  • sprin chen grags pa mtha’ med ston
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་གྲགས་པ་མཐའ་མེད་སྟོན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Mahā­meghānanta­kīrti; sprin chen mtha’ yas grags)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­189

Great Cloud Starlight

Wylie:
  • sprin chen skar ma’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་སྐར་མའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­190

Great Cloud Sun’s Essence

Wylie:
  • sprin chen nyi ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་ཉི་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­191

Great Cloud Supreme Bull’s Sound

Wylie:
  • sprin chen khyu mchog sgra
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་ཁྱུ་མཆོག་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen glang po che’i rgyal po’i sgra)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­192

Great Cloud Thunder

Wylie:
  • sprin chen ’brug sgra
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་འབྲུག་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­193

Great Cloud Utpala Scent

Wylie:
  • sprin chen ut+pa la’i dri
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་ཨུཏྤ་ལའི་དྲི།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen pad ma sngon po’i bsung)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­194

Great Dharma Power

Wylie:
  • chos chen mthu
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཆེན་མཐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: chos kyi stobs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­195

Great Glory

Wylie:
  • dpal chen
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­196

Great Golden Radiant Array

Wylie:
  • gser ’od chen pos bkod pa
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་འོད་ཆེན་པོས་བཀོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: gser gyi ’od rgyan chen po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­197

Great Mass of Light

Wylie:
  • ’od zer gyi phung po chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་གྱི་ཕུང་པོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha in the distant past.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­46
  • 5.­79-82
  • g.­164
g.­198

Great Ocean Profound King

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho zab mo’i rgyal po
  • rgya mtsho chen po zab mo’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ་ཟབ་མོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ་ཆེན་པོ་ཟབ་མོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Mahā­gaṃbhīra­sagara­rāja; rgya mtsho chen po zab mo’i rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­199

Haimavata

Wylie:
  • gangs can
Tibetan:
  • གངས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • haimavata AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: gangs ri)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­200

Haridhara

Wylie:
  • ha ri tshig ’chang
Tibetan:
  • ཧ་རི་ཚིག་འཆང་།
Sanskrit:
  • haridhara AD

Unidentified deity. Possibly Kṛṣṇa.

Acording to Lithang and Cone. Degé, etc.: hi ri tshig ’chang.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­103
g.­201

Hārītī

Wylie:
  • ’phrog ma
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲོག་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • hārītī AS

A rākṣasī with hundreds of children whom the Buddha converted into a protector of children.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­85
  • 1.­26
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 15.­104
  • 22.­53
  • n.­370
g.­202

higher cognitions

Wylie:
  • mngon par shes pa
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་ཤེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhijñā AS

The higher cognitions are listed as either five or six. The first five are divine sight, divine hearing, knowing how to manifest miracles, remembering previous lives, and knowing what is in the minds of others. A sixth, knowing that all defects have been eliminated, is often added. The first five are attained through concentration (Skt. dhyāna), and are sometimes described as worldly, as they can be attained to some extent by non-Buddhist yogis, while the sixth is supramundane and attained only by realization.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­39
  • 3.­46
  • 5.­23
  • 6.­67
  • 12.­61-63
  • 12.­90
  • 15.­36
  • 15.­57
  • 19.­15
g.­203

Highest Jewels

Wylie:
  • rin chen bla ma
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་བླ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­20
g.­204

hundred and eighty unique qualities

Wylie:
  • ma ’dres pa’i chos brgya brgyad chu
Tibetan:
  • མ་འདྲེས་པའི་ཆོས་བརྒྱ་བརྒྱད་ཆུ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

This term is uncommon in the Kangyur as it seems to appear only in this sūtra and in Toh 555. It is found in Yijing’s Chinese version from which the Tibetan translation of Toh 555 was produced. It may originally have been a reference to the eighteen unique qualities of a buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­40
g.­205

Hundredth Moment

Wylie:
  • skad brgya pa
Tibetan:
  • སྐད་བརྒྱ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣaṇaśatara AD

A god who is the king of lightning in the southern direction.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­2
g.­206

Immaculate Banner

Wylie:
  • rdul dang bral ba’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་དང་བྲལ་བའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A world realm in the distant future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 23.­4
g.­207

imputed

Wylie:
  • kun brtags pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་བརྟགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • parikalpita AD

Conceptual cognition; an alternative translation is “the imaginary.” One of the three natures that are a central philosophy of the Yogācāra tradition.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­20
g.­208

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra AD

The deity that is also called Mahendra, “lord of the devas,” who dwells on the summit of Mount Sumeru and wields a thunderbolt. He is also known as Śakra (Tib. brgya byin, “hundred offerings”). The Buddhist tradition sometimes interprets this name as an abbreviation of śata-kratu, “one who has performed a hundred sacrifices.” The highest Vedic sacrifice was the horse sacrifice, and there is a tradition that Indra became the lord of the gods through performing them.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­34
  • 22.­37
  • n.­38
  • g.­52
  • g.­71
  • g.­233
  • g.­305
  • g.­316
  • g.­390
  • g.­473
  • g.­526
g.­209

ironwood flowers

Wylie:
  • nA ga ge sar
Tibetan:
  • ནཱ་ག་གེ་སར།
Sanskrit:
  • nāgakeśara AS
  • keśarā

Mesua ferrea. Evergreen tree up to 100 feet tall. Known as Assam ironwood, Ceylon ironwood, Indian rose chestnut, Cobra’s saffron, and nāgakesara. The flowers are large and fragrant, with four white petals and a yellow center.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­210

Jalāgamā

Wylie:
  • chu ’bab pa
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་འབབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • jalāgamā AS

A river.

(Toh 555: chu skyes)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 25.­13
  • 25.­17
g.­211

Jalagarbha

Wylie:
  • chu’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཆུའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jalagarbha AD

The younger son of Jalavāhana and Jalāmbujagarbhā.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­17
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­49
g.­212

Jalāmbara

Wylie:
  • chu’i gos
Tibetan:
  • ཆུའི་གོས།
Sanskrit:
  • jalāmbara AS

The elder son of Jalavāhana and Jalāmbujagarbhā.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 25.­3
  • 25.­17
  • 25.­19-21
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­39
  • 25.­41-42
  • 25.­49
g.­213

Jalāmbujagarbhā

Wylie:
  • chu’i pad+ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཆུའི་པདྨའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jalāmbujagarbhā AS

The wife of Jalavāhana.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 25.­2-3
  • 25.­48
  • g.­211
  • g.­212
g.­214

Jalavāhana

Wylie:
  • chu ’bebs
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་འབེབས།
Sanskrit:
  • jalavāhana AS

A learned physician in the distant past and son of Jaṭiṃdhara who, as a result of performing Dharma recitations while standing in a lake, ensured the rebirth of ten thousand fish into the paradise of Trāyastriṃśa. He was the Buddha in a previous life.

Located in 49 passages in the translation:

  • s.­2
  • i.­7
  • i.­88-89
  • 24.­4
  • 24.­6-7
  • 24.­12
  • 24.­22-24
  • 24.­26-27
  • 25.­1-2
  • 25.­4-7
  • 25.­9
  • 25.­11-14
  • 25.­17-19
  • 25.­21
  • 25.­24-25
  • 25.­27-30
  • 25.­32-39
  • 25.­41
  • 25.­43
  • 25.­47
  • 25.­53
  • g.­211
  • g.­212
  • g.­213
g.­215

Jambu Golden Victory Banner That is Golden in Appearance

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu gser gyi rgyal mtshan gser du snang ba
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུ་གསེར་གྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན་གསེར་དུ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A tathāgata.

(Toh 555: Suvarṇaketuprabha; gser tog ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­8
g.­216

Jambū River

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i chu klung
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་ཆུ་ཀླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambūnadī AS

The rivers that flow down from the immense lake at the foot of the legendary Jambu tree. The fruits of that tree are made of gold and are carried down by the rivers through Jambudvīpa. Such gold is considered the best kind.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­74
g.­217

Jambudvīpa

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu gling
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུ་གླིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambudvīpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name of the southern continent in Buddhist cosmology, which can signify either the known human world, or more specifically the Indian subcontinent, literally “the jambu island/continent.” Jambu is the name used for a range of plum-like fruits from trees belonging to the genus Szygium, particularly Szygium jambos and Szygium cumini, and it has commonly been rendered “rose apple,” although “black plum” may be a less misleading term. Among various explanations given for the continent being so named, one (in the Abhidharmakośa) is that a jambu tree grows in its northern mountains beside Lake Anavatapta, mythically considered the source of the four great rivers of India, and that the continent is therefore named from the tree or the fruit. Jambudvīpa has the Vajrāsana at its center and is the only continent upon which buddhas attain awakening.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­58
  • 4.­100
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­7
  • 12.­17-19
  • 12.­63-64
  • 12.­108
  • 12.­110-111
  • 12.­120
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­97
  • 16.­1
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­5
  • 18.­8
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­8
  • 20.­69
  • 21.­25
  • 21.­27
  • 22.­24
  • 22.­65
  • 22.­70
  • 22.­75
  • 22.­77
  • 22.­79
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­30-31
  • n.­272
  • n.­467
  • g.­82
  • g.­216
  • g.­443
g.­218

Jaṭiṃdhara

Wylie:
  • ral pa ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • རལ་པ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • jaṭiṃdhara AD

A head merchant and physician in the distant past.

(Toh 555: Jaladhara; chu ’dzin)

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­88-89
  • 24.­3-4
  • 24.­6-7
  • 24.­12
  • 25.­46
  • g.­214
g.­219

jina

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jina AS

An epithet for a buddha meaning “victorious one.”

Located in 43 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­56
  • 4.­62
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­103
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­8
  • 7.­17
  • 7.­19-21
  • 7.­23
  • 7.­37
  • 9.­33
  • 10.­2
  • 12.­3
  • 12.­42
  • 12.­101-105
  • 15.­104
  • 21.­3
  • 21.­6
  • 21.­9
  • 21.­12
  • 22.­8
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­4-8
  • 29.­5
  • 29.­7-8
  • n.­108
  • n.­124
  • n.­150
g.­220

Jinamitra

Wylie:
  • dzi na mi tra
Tibetan:
  • ཛི་ན་མི་ཏྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • jinamitra AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Jinamitra was invited to Tibet during the reign of King Tri Songdetsen (khri srong lde btsan, r. 742–98 ᴄᴇ) and was involved with the translation of nearly two hundred texts, continuing into the reign of King Ralpachen (ral pa can, r. 815–38 ᴄᴇ). He was one of the small group of paṇḍitas responsible for the Mahāvyutpatti Sanskrit–Tibetan dictionary.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­23
  • i.­30
  • c.­1
g.­221

Jinarāja

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba’i rgyal
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བའི་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jinarāja AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: ’dam bu rgyal)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­44
g.­222

Jinarṣabha

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba khyu mchog
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ་ཁྱུ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • jinarṣabha AD

A yakṣa king and the son of Vaiśravaṇa.

(Toh 555: rtag tu rgyal)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­79-80
  • 22.­44
g.­223

Joyful High King

Wylie:
  • dga’ bas mtho ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བས་མཐོ་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: ’phags par dga’ ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­224

Jvalanāntara­tejo­rāja

Wylie:
  • 'bar ba’i khyad par gyi gzi brjid kyi rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བར་བའི་ཁྱད་པར་གྱི་གཟི་བརྗིད་ཀྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jvalanāntara­tejo­rāja AS

A deity in the Trāyastriṃśa paradise.

(Toh 557: ’bar ba’i khyad par gyi gzi brjid rgyal po. Toh 555: mchog tu rgyal ba’i ’od)

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­6
  • 23.­13-14
  • 23.­16-17
  • 25.­50
g.­225

kalaviṅka

Wylie:
  • ka la ping ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ལ་པིང་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kalaviṅka AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Buddhist literature refers to a mythical bird whose call is said to be far more beautiful than that of all other birds, and so compelling that it can be heard even before the bird has hatched. The call of the kalaviṅka is thus used as an analogy to describe the sound of the discourse of bodhisattvas as being far superior to that of śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas, even before bodhisattvas attain awakening. In some cases, the kalaviṅka also takes on mythical characteristics, being depicted as part human, part bird. It is also the sixteenth of the eighty designs on the palms and soles of a tathāgata.

While it is equated to an Indian bird renowned for its beautiful song, there is some uncertainty regarding the identity of the kalaviṅka; some dictionaries declare it to be a type of Indian cuckoo (probably Eudynamys scolopacea, also known as the asian koel) or a red and green sparrow (possibly Amandava amandava, also known as the red avadavat).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 27.­4
g.­226

kalyāṇamitra

Wylie:
  • dge ba’i bshes gnyen
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བའི་བཤེས་གཉེན།
Sanskrit:
  • kalyāṇamitra AS

A spiritual teacher who can contribute to an individual’s progress on the spiritual path to awakening and act wholeheartedly for the welfare of students.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­119
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­53
g.­227

Kāmaśreṣṭha

Wylie:
  • dod pa’i mchog
Tibetan:
  • དོད་པའི་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • kāmaśreṣṭha AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: ’dod mchog)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­228

Kanakabhujendra

Wylie:
  • gser gyi lag pa’i dbang po
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་ལག་པའི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakabhujendra AD

A son of the king Suvarṇabhujendra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­29
  • 7.­39
g.­229

Kanaka­prabhā­svara

Wylie:
  • gser gyi ’od
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • kanaka­prabhā­svara AS

A son of the king Suvarṇabhujendra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­29
  • 7.­39
g.­230

Kapila

Wylie:
  • ser skya
Tibetan:
  • སེར་སྐྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kapila AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: kha dog ser po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­42
g.­231

kārṣāpaṇa

Wylie:
  • kA pa Na
Tibetan:
  • ཀཱ་པ་ཎ།
Sanskrit:
  • kārṣāpaṇa AD

A coin that varied in value according to whether it was made of gold, silver, or copper.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­80
g.­232

Kauṇḍinya

Wylie:
  • kauN+Di n+ya
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽཎྜི་ནྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kauṇḍinya AS

According to the Chinese translation, this is the family name (姓) of the brahmin master Vyākaraṇa, an interlocutor in The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • i.­77
  • 1.­2
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­55
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­36
  • 15.­58
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­91
  • 15.­93
  • 15.­131
  • n.­62
g.­233

Kauśika

Wylie:
  • kau shi ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་ཤི་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kauśika AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

“One who belongs to the Kuśika lineage.” An epithet of the god Śakra, also known as Indra, the king of the gods in the Trāyastriṃśa heaven. In the Ṛgveda, Indra is addressed by the epithet Kauśika, with the implication that he is associated with the descendants of the Kuśika lineage (gotra) as their aiding deity. In later epic and Purāṇic texts, we find the story that Indra took birth as Gādhi Kauśika, the son of Kuśika and one of the Vedic poet-seers, after the Puru king Kuśika had performed austerities for one thousand years to obtain a son equal to Indra who could not be killed by others. In the Pāli Kusajātaka (Jāt V 141–45), the Buddha, in one of his former bodhisattva lives as a Trāyastriṃśa god, takes birth as the future king Kusa upon the request of Indra, who wishes to help the childless king of the Mallas, Okkaka, and his chief queen Sīlavatī. This story is also referred to by Nāgasena in the Milindapañha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­79
  • 5.­83-84
  • g.­390
g.­234

Kharaskandha

Wylie:
  • rab tshim byed
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཚིམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • kharaskandha AS

An asura king.

(Toh 555: bong bu dpung; Toh 556 Degé: rab tshim byed; Toh 557 Yongle and Peking: rab sil byed)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­51
g.­235

King Array of Pure Prayers

Wylie:
  • smon lam rnam par bkod pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྨོན་ལམ་རྣམ་པར་བཀོད་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The name prophesied for the bhikṣus who will attain buddhahood in the eon Difficult to Conquer King of Radiance, in the realm called Vimalaprabhā.

(Toh 555: Praṇidhāna­vyūhalaṃkāra­rāja; smon lam gyi bkod pas brgyan pa’i rgyal po)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­65
  • 10.­44
g.­236

King Fearless Powerful Array

Wylie:
  • spobs pa chen pos bkod pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྤོབས་པ་ཆེན་པོས་བཀོད་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: spobs pa chen po’i rgyan gyi rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­237

King of Illumination

Wylie:
  • snang ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྣང་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­238

King of Supreme Mount Meru

Wylie:
  • lhun po’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­239

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi ’am ci
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མི་འམ་ཅི།
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara AS
  • kiṃnara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “is that human?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status. Kinnaras are mythological beings found in both Buddhist and Brahmanical literature, where they are portrayed as creatures half human, half animal. They are often depicted as highly skilled celestial musicians.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • 1.­27
  • 1.­31
  • 2.­8
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­33
  • 15.­127
  • 21.­17
  • 22.­27
  • n.­39
g.­240

kleśa

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The essentially pure nature of mind is obscured and afflicted by various psychological defilements, which destroy the mind’s peace and composure and lead to unwholesome deeds of body, speech, and mind, acting as causes for continued existence in saṃsāra. Included among them are the primary afflictions of desire (rāga), anger (dveṣa), and ignorance (avidyā). It is said that there are eighty-four thousand of these negative mental qualities, for which the eighty-four thousand categories of the Buddha’s teachings serve as the antidote.

Kleśa is also commonly translated as “negative emotions,” “disturbing emotions,” and so on. The Pāli kilesa, Middle Indic kileśa, and Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit kleśa all primarily mean “stain” or “defilement.” The translation “affliction” is a secondary development that derives from the more general (non-Buddhist) classical understanding of √kliś (“to harm,“ “to afflict”). Both meanings are noted by Buddhist commentators.

Located in 40 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 1.­3
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­83
  • 2.­88
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­115
  • 3.­5-6
  • 3.­8
  • 3.­46-49
  • 3.­52
  • 4.­13
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­31
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­62
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­77
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­24
  • 6.­30
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­51-52
  • 6.­55
  • 6.­68
  • 6.­92
  • 6.­96
  • 6.­136
  • 7.­32
  • 9.­22
  • 9.­25-26
  • 10.­13
  • 12.­48
  • 19.­15
g.­241

Kṛtajña

Wylie:
  • byas pa gzo ba
Tibetan:
  • བྱས་པ་གཟོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛtajña AS

Known in the Avadāna literature as a previous life of the Buddha, his name is translated there as byas shes. In that tale, his brother (a previous life of Devadatta) gouges out his eyes. Nonetheless, a princess chooses him for a husband and is banished by her father, the king. When she speaks the words of truth of her love for him, one of Kṛtajña’s eyes is restored. When he speaks the words of truth that he has no hate for his brother, his other eye is restored, and he is enthroned by the king as his successor.

(Toh 555: drin gzo)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­116
g.­242

kṣatriya

Wylie:
  • rgyal rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣatriya AS

The warrior or aristocratic class of the four social classes of India. Rulers were often from this class.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­111
  • 4.­103
  • 5.­16
g.­243

Kṣitigarbha

Wylie:
  • sa’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • སའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣitigarbha AS

A bodhisattva.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 8.­31
g.­244

Kumāra

Wylie:
  • gzhon nu
Tibetan:
  • གཞོན་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāra AD

A polite address for a young man, it can, in context, also mean “prince.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­245

kumbhāṇḍa

Wylie:
  • grul bum
Tibetan:
  • གྲུལ་བུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbhāṇḍa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of dwarf beings subordinate to Virūḍhaka, one of the Four Great Kings, associated with the southern direction. The name uses a play on the word aṇḍa, which means “egg” but is also a euphemism for a testicle. Thus, they are often depicted as having testicles as big as pots (from kumbha, or “pot”).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • g.­517
g.­246

Kumbhīra

Wylie:
  • ji ’jigs
Tibetan:
  • ཇི་འཇིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbhīra AS

A yakṣa king; also known as Kubera.

(Toh 555: ku be ra)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­42
g.­247

Kūṭadantī

Wylie:
  • so brtsegs
Tibetan:
  • སོ་བརྩེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kūṭadantī AS

A fierce goddess.

(Toh 555: so brtsegs ma)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­248

Licchavī

Wylie:
  • lits+tsha bI
Tibetan:
  • ལིཙྪ་བཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • licchavī AS

A clan with its capital Vaiśalī, in present-day Bihar, north of the Ganges. Their capital was a place where the Buddha had many followers when they were an independent republic.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 2.­35-41
  • 2.­55
  • n.­64
  • g.­11
  • g.­12
  • g.­80
  • g.­118
  • g.­120
  • g.­195
  • g.­251
  • g.­268
  • g.­330
  • g.­361
  • g.­408
  • g.­418
  • g.­445
  • g.­453
  • g.­491
g.­249

Lightning Tongue

Wylie:
  • glog lce
Tibetan:
  • གློག་ལྕེ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­20
g.­250

linseed

Wylie:
  • dbyi mo
Tibetan:
  • དབྱི་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cavya AS

Oil from the seed of the flax plant (Linum usitatissimum).

(Toh 555: smig bcud)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­251

Lion’s Light

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­252

Lord with Jeweled Hands

Wylie:
  • lag na rin chen dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ལག་ན་རིན་ཆེན་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: rin po che’i phyag dbang phyug)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­253

Lotus Face

Wylie:
  • pad+mo’i gdong
Tibetan:
  • པདྨོའི་གདོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: padma’i bzhin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­254

Mahābala

Wylie:
  • stobs chen
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābala AS

A nāga king.

(Toh 555: stobs po che)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­255

Mahābhāga

Wylie:
  • skal ba chen po
Tibetan:
  • སྐལ་བ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābhāga AS

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­45
g.­256

Mahābrahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs chen
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahmā AD

“Great Brahmā.” The highest of the three (or, in this sūtra, four) paradises that correspond to the first dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­257

Mahābrahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs chen
  • tshangs pa chen
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ཆེན།
  • ཚངས་པ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahmā AD

See “Brahmā.”

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­17-18
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­30
  • 10.­32-34
  • 10.­37-39
  • 10.­43
  • 10.­45
  • 10.­47
  • 10.­49-50
  • 10.­52
  • 14.­11
  • g.­71
  • g.­72
g.­258

Mahācakravāḍa

Wylie:
  • khor yug chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ཡུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahācakravāḍa

This appears to refer to the great circles of mountains that enclose a thousand worlds, each with its own Cakravāḍa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­33
g.­259

Mahādeva

Wylie:
  • lha chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahādeva AS

A prince in the past, the middle son of the King Mahāratha.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­24
  • 26.­31
  • 26.­48
  • 26.­50
  • 26.­89
  • 26.­93
  • 26.­95
  • 26.­144
  • g.­502
g.­260

Mahāghoṣa

Wylie:
  • sgra chen
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāghoṣa AD

A nāga king.

(Toh 555: sgra bo che)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­261

Mahāgrāsa

Wylie:
  • kham po che
Tibetan:
  • ཁམ་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāgrāsa AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 557: kam po ji (corrupt), Toh 555: mchog tu rgyal ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­45
g.­262

Mahākāla

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāla AS

A yakṣa lord.

(Toh 555: nag po che)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­71
  • 22.­45
g.­263

Mahākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāśyapa AS

One of the Buddha’s principal pupils, who became a leader of the saṅgha after the Buddha’s passing.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­264

Mahāmaudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu chen po
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāmaudgalyāyana AS

One of the principal śrāvaka disciples of the Buddha, paired with Śāriputra. He was renowned for his miraculous powers. His family clan was descended from Mudgala, hence his name Maudgalyāyana, “the son of Mudgala’s descendants.” Respectfully referred to as Mahāmaudgalyāyana.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 15.­117
  • n.­537
  • g.­42
g.­265

Mahānāman

Wylie:
  • ming chen
Tibetan:
  • མིང་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahānāman AD

One of the Buddha’s five companions in asceticism before his enlightenment and later one of his first five pupils, he attained the state of a stream entrant after three days, the fourth to attain that realization. He attained the state of an arhat on hearing The Sūtra on the Characteristics of Selflessness. Not to be confused with the cousin of the Buddha, who had the same name and was a significant lay follower and patron.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­266

Mahāpāla

Wylie:
  • chos skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpāla AS

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­267

Mahāpiṅgala

Wylie:
  • ping ga la chen po
Tibetan:
  • པིང་ག་ལ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpiṅgala AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: ma hā ping ga la)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­44
g.­268

Mahāprabha

Wylie:
  • ’od chen
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāprabha AD

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­269

Mahāpradīpa

Wylie:
  • sgron ma chen po
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲོན་མ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpradīpa AS

A tathāgata.

(Toh 555: Mahāpradīpaprabha; sgron ma chen po’i ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­13
g.­270

Mahāprajāpatī

Wylie:
  • skye dgu’i bdag mo chen mo
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུའི་བདག་མོ་ཆེན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāprajāpatī AD

The Buddha’s mother’s sister and his stepmother. She was the mother of Nanda, whom the Buddha later inspired to become a monk, as recorded in two sūtras bearing his name and elsewhere. She became the first bhikṣuṇī after the death of the Buddha’s father.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 26.­144
g.­271

Mahāpraṇāda

Wylie:
  • sgra chen po
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpraṇāda AS

A prince in the past, the eldest son of King Mahāratha.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­28
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­32
  • 26.­48
  • 26.­89
  • 26.­93
  • 26.­95
  • 26.­143
g.­272

Mahāpraṇālin

Wylie:
  • yur chen can
Tibetan:
  • ཡུར་ཆེན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpraṇālin AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 556 Degé: yul chen can; Toh 557 Degé: yul chen can; Toh 555: pra na li chen)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­273

Mahāratha

Wylie:
  • shing rta chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་རྟ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāratha AS

A king in the past.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­88
  • 26.­91
  • 26.­103
  • 26.­115
  • 26.­117-118
  • 26.­121
  • 26.­123
  • 26.­125
  • 26.­131
  • 26.­142-143
  • 26.­145
  • g.­259
  • g.­271
  • g.­276
g.­274

Mahāratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i tog chen po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་ཏོག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāratnaketu AS

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Mahāratnadhvaja; rin po che’i rgyal mtshan chen po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­275

mahāsattva

Wylie:
  • sems can chen po
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་ཅན་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsattva AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term can be understood to mean “great courageous one” or "great hero,” or (from the Sanskrit) simply “great being,” and is almost always found as an epithet of “bodhisattva.” The qualification “great” in this term, according to the majority of canonical definitions, focuses on the generic greatness common to all bodhisattvas, i.e., the greatness implicit in the bodhisattva vow itself in terms of outlook, aspiration, number of beings to be benefited, potential or eventual accomplishments, and so forth. In this sense the mahā- (“great”) is close in its connotations to the mahā- in “Mahāyāna.” While individual bodhisattvas described as mahāsattva may in many cases also be “great” in terms of their level of realization, this is largely coincidental, and in the canonical texts the epithet is not restricted to bodhisattvas at any particular point in their career. Indeed, in a few cases even bodhisattvas whose path has taken a wrong direction are still described as bodhisattva mahāsattva.

Later commentarial writings do nevertheless define the term‍—variably‍—in terms of bodhisattvas having attained a particular level (bhūmi) or realization. The most common qualifying criteria mentioned are attaining the path of seeing, attaining irreversibility (according to its various definitions), or attaining the seventh bhūmi.

Located in 63 passages in the translation:

  • s.­2
  • i.­90
  • 1.­3-4
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­68-69
  • 2.­81
  • 2.­93
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­5
  • 3.­12
  • 5.­11-14
  • 5.­33-35
  • 5.­42
  • 5.­62
  • 5.­64
  • 5.­66
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­37-47
  • 6.­79
  • 6.­89
  • 6.­93
  • 6.­97
  • 6.­101
  • 6.­105
  • 6.­109
  • 6.­113
  • 6.­117
  • 6.­121
  • 6.­125
  • 6.­129
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­4
  • 8.­30-39
  • 9.­1
  • 14.­6
  • n.­57
g.­276

Mahāsattva

Wylie:
  • snying stobs chen po
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་སྟོབས་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsattva AS

A prince in the past, the youngest son of King Mahāratha. A previous life of the Buddha, when he decided to give his body to a tigress.

(Toh 557: sems can chen po)

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­21
  • 26.­25
  • 26.­29
  • 26.­33
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­42
  • 26.­55
  • 26.­83
  • 26.­88
  • 26.­91
  • 26.­93
  • 26.­112-113
  • 26.­128-130
  • 26.­137
  • 26.­142
  • 26.­145-146
  • n.­531
g.­277

Mahāsthāmaprāpta

Wylie:
  • mthu chen thob
Tibetan:
  • མཐུ་ཆེན་ཐོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsthāmaprāpta AS

One of the two principal bodhisattvas in Sukhāvatī and prominent in Chinese Buddhism. In Tibetan Buddhism he is identified with Vajrapāṇi, though they are separate bodhisattvas in the sūtras.

(Toh 555: mthu chen po thob pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­37
g.­278

Mahāyāna

Wylie:
  • theg pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāyāna

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

When the Buddhist teachings are classified according to their power to lead beings to an awakened state, a distinction is made between the teachings of the Lesser Vehicle (Hīnayāna), which emphasizes the individual’s own freedom from cyclic existence as the primary motivation and goal, and those of the Great Vehicle (Mahāyāna), which emphasizes altruism and has the liberation of all sentient beings as the principal objective. As the term “Great Vehicle” implies, the path followed by bodhisattvas is analogous to a large carriage that can transport a vast number of people to liberation, as compared to a smaller vehicle for the individual practitioner.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­5-7
  • 1.­10
  • 3.­38
  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­27-28
  • 5.­43
  • 5.­46
  • 5.­55-56
  • 13.­4
  • 25.­22-23
  • 29.­15
g.­279

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug chen po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara AS

An epithet of Śiva; sometimes refers specifically to one of the forms of Śiva.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­140
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 22.­39
g.­280

mahoraga

Wylie:
  • lto ’phye chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྟོ་འཕྱེ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahoraga AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally “great serpents,” mahoragas are supernatural beings depicted as large, subterranean beings with human torsos and heads and the lower bodies of serpents. Their movements are said to cause earthquakes, and they make up a class of subterranean geomantic spirits whose movement through the seasons and months of the year is deemed significant for construction projects.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • 2.­8
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­33
  • 15.­127
  • 21.­17
g.­281

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The bodhisattva Maitreya is an important figure in many Buddhist traditions, where he is unanimously regarded as the buddha of the future era. He is said to currently reside in the heaven of Tuṣita, as Śākyamuni’s regent, where he awaits the proper time to take his final rebirth and become the fifth buddha in the Fortunate Eon, reestablishing the Dharma in this world after the teachings of the current buddha have disappeared. Within the Mahāyāna sūtras, Maitreya is elevated to the same status as other central bodhisattvas such as Mañjuśrī and Avalokiteśvara, and his name appears frequently in sūtras, either as the Buddha’s interlocutor or as a teacher of the Dharma. Maitreya literally means “Loving One.” He is also known as Ajita, meaning “Invincible.”

For more information on Maitreya, see, for example, the introduction to Maitreya’s Setting Out (Toh 198).

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 1.­4
  • 8.­38
  • 8.­44
  • 15.­122
  • 17.­19
  • 22.­19
  • 26.­143
g.­282

Malaya

Wylie:
  • ma la ya
Tibetan:
  • མ་ལ་ཡ།
Sanskrit:
  • malaya AS

The range of mountains in West India, also called the Western Ghats, known for its sandalwood forests.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­74
g.­283

Manasvī

Wylie:
  • gzi can
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • manasvī AD

A nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­284

Manasvin

Wylie:
  • gzi can
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • manasvin AD

A nāga.

(Toh 555: yid bzhin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­101
g.­285

maṇḍala

Wylie:
  • dkyil ’khor
Tibetan:
  • དཀྱིལ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇḍala AD

Literally a “disk” or “circle,” in the ritual context a maṇḍala is a sacred space on the ground or a raised platform, arranged according to a pattern that varies from rite to rite.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10-11
  • 8.­45-46
  • 15.­52
  • 19.­15
g.­286

Maṅgala

Wylie:
  • bkra shis
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས།
Sanskrit:
  • maṅgala AS

A deva.

(Toh 555: rnam par bkra shis)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­287

Maṇibhadra

Wylie:
  • nor bu bzang
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇibhadra AS

A yakṣa king, the brother of Kubera.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­42
g.­288

Māṇibhadra

Wylie:
  • nor bu bzang
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • māṇibhadra AS

A yakṣa general.

(Toh 555: rin chen bzang)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
g.­289

Manifesting Great Fear

Wylie:
  • ’jigs pa chen po ston
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་པ་ཆེན་པོ་སྟོན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa.

(Toh 555: ’jigs pa mngon du ston pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­8
g.­290

Maṇikaṇṭha

Wylie:
  • nor bu’i mgul
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུའི་མགུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇikaṇṭha AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: nor bu gtsug)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­44
g.­291

Mañjuśrī

Wylie:
  • ’jam dpal
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśrī AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Mañjuśrī is one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha” and a bodhisattva who embodies wisdom. He is a major figure in the Mahāyāna sūtras, appearing often as an interlocutor of the Buddha. In his most well-known iconographic form, he is portrayed bearing the sword of wisdom in his right hand and a volume of the Prajñā­pāramitā­sūtra in his left. To his name, Mañjuśrī, meaning “Gentle and Glorious One,” is often added the epithet Kumārabhūta, “having a youthful form.” He is also called Mañjughoṣa, Mañjusvara, and Pañcaśikha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 1.­4
  • 8.­33
  • 8.­44
  • 22.­19
  • 26.­144
  • g.­322
g.­292

Markaṭa

Wylie:
  • spre’u
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲེའུ།
Sanskrit:
  • markaṭa AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: spre’u rnams kyi ni rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­293

mātṛkā

Wylie:
  • ma mo
Tibetan:
  • མ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātṛkā AD

“Mother goddesses.” Anglicized as matrika. A group of goddesses, often eight in number, that correspond to principal male deities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­104
g.­294

Māyā

Wylie:
  • sgyu ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • སྒྱུ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • māyā AD

The Buddha’s mother, more commonly called Māyādevī.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­143
  • g.­107
g.­295

Moon Crest

Wylie:
  • zla ba’i gtsug phud
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བའི་གཙུག་ཕུད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A deva.

(Toh 555: zla ba’i gtsug tor)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­296

Mucilinda

Wylie:
  • btang bzung
Tibetan:
  • བཏང་བཟུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • mucilinda AD

A nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­49
g.­297

Munīndra

Wylie:
  • thub dbang
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • munīndra AS

“Lord of sages”; an epithet for the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­15
g.­298

musk

Wylie:
  • skal ba che
Tibetan:
  • སྐལ་བ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābhāgā AS

Also called subhaga in Sanskrit. Derived from a gland on the musk deer.

(Toh 555: sha ma ka sha mi. Chinese: mojiapojia; 莫迦婆伽.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­299

mustard seed

Wylie:
  • yung kar
  • yungs ’bru
Tibetan:
  • ཡུང་ཀར།
  • ཡུངས་འབྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarṣapa AS

Variant spelling: yung dkar; “white mustard.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­36
  • 2.­38-39
  • 2.­43
  • 2.­60
  • 15.­7
  • 19.­15
g.­300

Nadīkāśyapa

Wylie:
  • chu klung ’od srung
  • chu bo ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ཀླུང་འོད་སྲུང་།
  • ཆུ་བོ་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • nadīkāśyapa AD

The brother of Gayākāśyapa and Uruvilva­kāśyapa. A practitioner of fire offering at Uruvilva (Bodhgayā), he and his three hundred students were converted to becoming bhikṣus of the Buddha. He and his brothers and their students were the third group to become followers of the Buddha after his enlightenment.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­167
  • g.­487
g.­301

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 46 passages in the translation:

  • i.­75
  • i.­85
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­7
  • 1.­27
  • 1.­31
  • 2.­8
  • 11.­4
  • 12.­32-33
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­58
  • 14.­20-21
  • 14.­24
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­41
  • 15.­71
  • 15.­101
  • 15.­127
  • 21.­17
  • 22.­15
  • 22.­27
  • 22.­49-50
  • 22.­70
  • n.­39
  • n.­235
  • g.­18
  • g.­28
  • g.­171
  • g.­249
  • g.­254
  • g.­260
  • g.­283
  • g.­284
  • g.­296
  • g.­306
  • g.­317
  • g.­377
  • g.­378
  • g.­386
  • g.­483
  • g.­503
  • g.­511
  • g.­518
g.­302

Nāgāyana

Wylie:
  • mthu bo che
Tibetan:
  • མཐུ་བོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāgāyana AS

A yakṣa king.

The Tibetan appears to have been translated from a manuscript that had nārāyaṇa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­303

Nairañjanāvasinī

Wylie:
  • nai rany+dza nar gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • ནཻ་རཉྫ་ནར་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nairañjanāvasinī AD

Goddess of the Nairañjanā River, near which the Buddha practiced asceticism and later attained enlightenment.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­26
g.­304

Nakula

Wylie:
  • khyim med
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱིམ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • nakula AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: na ku la)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­305

Namuci

Wylie:
  • phrag rtsub
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲག་རྩུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • namuci AS

An asura king; this is the name of Indra’s principal enemy among the asuras. In Buddhist mythology, Namuci appears as a drought-causing demon, and is also a name of Māra, the principal opponent of the Buddhadharma.

(Toh 555: phrag chen)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­29
  • 22.­51
  • n.­344
g.­306

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda AD

A nāga king.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 22.­49
  • g.­270
g.­307

Nārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • sred med bu
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa AD

An alternate name for Viṣṇu (khyab ’jug).

(Toh 555: mthu bo che)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­8
  • 22.­39
  • n.­460
  • g.­302
g.­308

Net of Light

Wylie:
  • ’od kyi dra ba can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཀྱི་དྲ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­67-68
  • 5.­69
  • 22.­73
  • 22.­75-76
g.­309

Nikaṇṭha

Wylie:
  • nges mgrin
Tibetan:
  • ངེས་མགྲིན།
Sanskrit:
  • nikaṇṭha AD

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: ne gan)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­44
g.­310

Nirmāṇarati

Wylie:
  • ’phrul dga’
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲུལ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarati AD

“Delight in Emanations.” The second highest paradise in the desire realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 15.­122
g.­311

nirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • mya ngan las ’das pa
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirvāṇa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Sanskrit, the term nirvāṇa literally means “extinguishment” and the Tibetan mya ngan las ’das pa literally means “gone beyond sorrow.” As a general term, it refers to the cessation of all suffering, afflicted mental states (kleśa), and causal processes (karman) that lead to rebirth and suffering in cyclic existence, as well as to the state in which all such rebirth and suffering has permanently ceased.

More specifically, three main types of nirvāṇa are identified. (1) The first type of nirvāṇa, called nirvāṇa with remainder (sopadhiśeṣanirvāṇa), is the state in which arhats or buddhas have attained awakening but are still dependent on the conditioned aggregates until their lifespan is exhausted. (2) At the end of life, given that there are no more causes for rebirth, these aggregates cease and no new aggregates arise. What occurs then is called nirvāṇa without remainder ( anupadhiśeṣanirvāṇa), which refers to the unconditioned element (dhātu) of nirvāṇa in which there is no remainder of the aggregates. (3) The Mahāyāna teachings distinguish the final nirvāṇa of buddhas from that of arhats, the nirvāṇa of arhats not being considered ultimate. The buddhas attain what is called nonabiding nirvāṇa (apratiṣṭhitanirvāṇa), which transcends the extremes of saṃsāra and nirvāṇa, i.e., existence and peace. This is the nirvāṇa that is the goal of the Mahāyāna path.

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • i.­36
  • i.­38
  • 1.­3
  • 2.­20-21
  • 2.­23-24
  • 2.­31-33
  • 2.­65
  • 2.­67-69
  • 2.­71-81
  • 2.­83-93
  • 2.­95-106
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­120
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­11
  • 3.­16-17
  • 3.­19
  • 3.­31
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­60
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­72
  • 5.­84
  • 6.­36
  • 6.­62
  • 6.­133
  • 10.­6
  • 10.­12
  • 21.­5
  • 23.­3-4
  • 24.­2
  • 27.­6
  • n.­79
  • g.­401
g.­312

Nityodyukta

Wylie:
  • rtag tu brtson pa
Tibetan:
  • རྟག་ཏུ་བརྩོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nityodyukta AD

(Toh 555: brtson ’grus yongs su ldan pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­313

non-returner

Wylie:
  • phyir mi ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱིར་མི་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anāgāmin AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The third of the four attainments of śrāvakas, this term refers to a person who will no longer take rebirth in the desire realm (kāmadhātu), but either be reborn in the Pure Abodes (śuddhāvāsa) or reach the state of an arhat in their current lifetime. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­22
  • g.­48
  • g.­430
g.­314

nut grass

Wylie:
  • gla sgang
Tibetan:
  • གླ་སྒང་།
Sanskrit:
  • musta AS

Cyperus rotundus. Its tubers are used in Āyurveda.

(Toh 557: gas gang)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­315

once-returner

Wylie:
  • lan cig phyir ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • ལན་ཅིག་ཕྱིར་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sakṛdāgāmin AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One who has achieved the second of the four levels of attainment on the śrāvaka path and who will attain liberation after only one more birth. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­22
  • g.­430
g.­316

orris root

Wylie:
  • in+d+ra hasta
Tibetan:
  • ཨིནྡྲ་ཧསྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • indrahasta AS

Bletilla hyacinthina, hyacinth orchid. See Ludvik 2007, p. 310. Or possibly Rhizoma iridis. The root of the iris flower, specifically the Indian iris (Iris pallida). The root is said to resemble an arm, while the leaves resemble swords, and therefore there is a folktale of its having originated from Indra cutting off a yakṣa’s arm.

(Toh 557: dbang po’i lag)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­317

Padma

Wylie:
  • pad+mo
Tibetan:
  • པདྨོ།
Sanskrit:
  • padma AD

A nāga king.

(Toh 555: pad ma)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­318

Padmā

Wylie:
  • pe ma
Tibetan:
  • པེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmā AD

One of the names of Lakṣmī, also known as Śrī.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­102
  • n.­368
g.­319

Padmottara­suvarṇa­dhvaja

Wylie:
  • pad+ma dam pa gser gyi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • པདྨ་དམ་པ་གསེར་གྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • padmottara­suvarṇa­dhvaja RS

“Sublime Lotus Golden Banner.” The palace of the goddess Śrī, also known as Lakṣmī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­1
g.­320

palash

Wylie:
  • pa la sha
Tibetan:
  • པ་ལ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • palāśa AS

Butea frondosa or Butea monosperma. A tree that grows up to 15 meters tall and has bright red flowers. Other names include flame of the forest, riddle tree, Judas tree, parrot tree, bastard teak, dhak (in Hindi), palas (in Hindi), porasum (in Tamil), and khakda (in Gujarati). There is a tradition of combining its leaves together to make a plate for food.

This is also known as kiṃśuka, which is translated in other sūtras as ne tso ci las grub pa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­52
g.­321

Pañcāla

Wylie:
  • lnga len
Tibetan:
  • ལྔ་ལེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcāla AD

One of the fifteen lands in ancient India at the time of the Buddha. This was at the western end of the Ganges basin, corresponding in the present time to an area in the western part of Uttar Pradesh.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 26.­3
g.­322

Pañcaśikha

Wylie:
  • zur phud lnga can
Tibetan:
  • ཟུར་ཕུད་ལྔ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaśikha AD

A gandharva said to live on Gandhamādana Mountain, on the central peak of five peaks, at the source of the Ganges. In the early sūtras he acts as a messenger between the devas and the Buddha. He is sometimes said to be a form of Mañjuśrī or historically to have been his original identity.

(Toh 555: mgo lnga)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­125
g.­323

Pāñcika

Wylie:
  • lngas rtsen
Tibetan:
  • ལྔས་རྩེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāñcika AD

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: pañ ts i ka)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­45
g.­324

Paranirmita­vaśavartin

Wylie:
  • gzhan ’phrul dbang byed
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་འཕྲུལ་དབང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • paranirmita­vaśavartin AD

“Power Over the Emanations of Others.” The highest paradise in the desire realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 10.­19
  • 15.­122
g.­325

Parīttābha

Wylie:
  • ’od chung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttābha AD

“Lesser Light.” The lowest of the three paradises that correspond to the second dhyāna in the form realm. The lowest paradise that is never destroyed at the end of a kalpa, but continues through all kalpas. In other texts translated as snang ba chung ngu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­326

Parīttaśubha

Wylie:
  • dge chung
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttaśubha AD

“Lesser Goodness.” The lowest of the three paradises that correspond to the third dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­327

perfections

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pāramitā AS

This term is used to refer to the main trainings of a bodhisattva. Because these trainings, when brought to perfection, lead one to transcend saṃsāra and reach the full awakening of a buddha, they receive the Sanskrit name pāramitā, meaning “perfection” or “gone to the farther shore.” They are usually listed as six: generosity, correct conduct (or discipline), patience, diligence, meditation (or concentration), and wisdom; four additional perfections are often added to this, totalling ten perfections: skillful methods, prayer, strength, and knowledge.

For a presentation of each one according to the view of this sūtra, see 6.­6–6.­27.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • i.­40
  • i.­51
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­96
  • 5.­33-35
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­28
  • 7.­27
  • 10.­46
  • 23.­7
  • 23.­12
g.­328

Piṅgala

Wylie:
  • dmar ser
Tibetan:
  • དམར་སེར།
Sanskrit:
  • piṅgala AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: zas sbyin)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 22.­42
  • n.­284-285
g.­329

Pinnacle of Lords

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i tog
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • —

The father of Balendraketu and a king in the distant past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­82
  • 20.­3
g.­330

Powerful Bestower

Wylie:
  • dbang po sbyin
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­331

Powerful King of Elephants

Wylie:
  • spos kyi glang po che mthu stobs rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་གླང་པོ་ཆེ་མཐུ་སྟོབས་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A garuḍa king.

(Toh 555: spos kyi rgyal po che’i byin gyi mthu dang ldan pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­9
g.­332

powers

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indriya AS

Faith, mindfulness, diligence, samādhi, and wisdom.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 3.­39
  • 3.­57
  • 4.­46
  • 5.­23
  • 12.­84
  • 12.­90
  • 22.­36
  • 22.­40
  • 22.­50
  • 22.­52
  • 24.­8
  • g.­39
  • g.­264
  • g.­357
  • g.­431
g.­333

Prabhājvala

Wylie:
  • ’od ’bar
Tibetan:
  • འོད་འབར།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhājvala AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­334

Prahrāda

Wylie:
  • dbang gzhan
Tibetan:
  • དབང་གཞན།
Sanskrit:
  • prahrāda AS

An asura king who waged a thousand-year war against the devas and was for a time victorious. He was the grandfather of Bali. Also known as Prahlādana.

(Toh 555: rab dga’)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­51
g.­335

Prajāpati

Wylie:
  • skye dgu
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུ
Sanskrit:
  • prajāpati AS

A Vedic deity who is seen particularly as being the god of animals, especially cattle, which he is said to have created.

(Toh 555: ’jig rten mgon po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­37
g.­336

Pramudita

Wylie:
  • rab dga’
Tibetan:
  • རབ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • pramudita AD

A deva.

(Toh 555: yid dga’ ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­337

Praṇālin

Wylie:
  • yur ba can
Tibetan:
  • ཡུར་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • praṇālin AS

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­338

Prasanna­vadanotpala­gandha­kūṭa

Wylie:
  • rab tu dang ba’i zhal ut+pa la’i dri brtsegs pa
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་དང་བའི་ཞལ་ཨུཏྤ་ལའི་དྲི་བརྩེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prasanna­vadanotpala­gandha­kūṭa AS

The name of ten thousand future buddhas.

(Toh 555: zhal dang spyan rnam par dag cing ut pa la’i dri’i ri mo)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • 23.­13
g.­339

pratyekabuddha

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyekabuddha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 1.­3
  • 2.­37
  • 3.­8
  • 3.­57
  • 4.­34
  • 5.­23
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­18
  • 8.­5
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­95
  • 15.­99
  • n.­64
  • g.­39
  • g.­340
  • g.­403
g.­340

Pratyeka­buddha­yāna

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyeka­buddha­yāna

The vehicle comprising the teaching of the pratyekabuddhas.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­27-28
  • 5.­36-38
  • 5.­43
  • 5.­46
  • 5.­55-56
g.­341

Precious Cloud Sandalwood Cool Body

Wylie:
  • sprin chen rin po che tsan+dan dri bsil sku
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་ཆེན་རིན་པོ་ཆེ་ཙནྡན་དྲི་བསིལ་སྐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: sprin chen rin po che’i tsan dan sku rnam par bsil ba)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­342

preta

Wylie:
  • yi dags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­61
  • 4.­19
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­10
  • 6.­92
  • 6.­96
  • 6.­104
  • 6.­108
  • 6.­112
  • 6.­116
  • 6.­120
  • 6.­124
  • 6.­128
  • 7.­11
  • 18.­11
  • 20.­54
  • n.­83
  • n.­86
g.­343

Prophesied Attainment

Wylie:
  • lung bstan mchog thob
Tibetan:
  • ལུང་བསྟན་མཆོག་ཐོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: gong du lung bstan pa thob pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­344

proximate kleśa

Wylie:
  • nye ba’i nyon mongs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བའི་ཉོན་མོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • upakleśa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The subsidiary afflictive emotions that arise in dependence upon the six root afflictive emotions (attachment, hatred, pride, ignorance, doubt, and wrong view); they are (1) anger (krodha, khro ba), (2) enmity/malice (upanāha, ’khon ’dzin), (3) concealment (mrakśa, ’chab pa), (4) outrage (pradāsa, ’tshig pa), (5) jealousy (īrśya, phrag dog), (6) miserliness (matsarya, ser sna), (7) deceit (māyā, sgyu), (8) dishonesty (śāṭhya, g.yo), (9) haughtiness (mada, rgyags pa), (10) harmfulness (vihiṃsa, rnam par ’tshe ba), (11) shamelessness (āhrīkya, ngo tsha med pa), (12) non-consideration (anapatrāpya, khril med pa), (13) lack of faith (aśraddhya, ma dad pa), (14) laziness (kausīdya, le lo), (15) non-conscientiousness (pramāda, bag med pa), (16) forgetfulness (muśitasmṛtitā, brjed nges), (17) non-introspection (asaṃprajanya, shes bzhin ma yin pa), (18) dullness (nigmagṇa, bying ba), (19) agitation (auddhatya, rgod pa), and (20) distraction (vikṣepa, rnam g.yeng) (Rigzin 329, 129).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­88
g.­345

Puṇya­kusuma­prabha

Wylie:
  • bsod nams kyi me tog ’od
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་ཀྱི་མེ་ཏོག་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇya­kusuma­prabha AD

Name of the park where the goddess Śrī dwells, not far from Alakāvati, the kingdom of the great king Vaiśravaṇa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­1
g.­346

Puṇyaprabha

Wylie:
  • bsod nams ’od
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprabha AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­347

Puṇyaprasava

Wylie:
  • bsod nams skyes pa
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྐྱེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprasava AD

“Generating Merit.” In the Sarvāstivāda tradition, the second highest of the three paradises that correspond to the fourth dhyāna in the form realm. Translated in other texts as bsod nams ’phel ba, “Increasing Merit.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­348

Pure Ethics

Wylie:
  • tshul khrims rnam dag
Tibetan:
  • ཚུལ་ཁྲིམས་རྣམ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: tshul khrims rnam par dag pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­349

Pūrṇabhadra

Wylie:
  • gang ba bzang po
Tibetan:
  • གང་བ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇabhadra AS

A yakṣa lord.

(Toh 555: rdzogs bzang)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­42
g.­350

Puṣya

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣya AS

One of the twenty-eight asterisms or constellations that the sun passes through during the course of a year, which are “lunar mansions” in the plane of the sky. It is composed of the three star systems: Gamma Cancri, Delta Cancri, and Theta Cancri. In the Western zodiac it is equivalent to the very end of Cancer and nearly half of Leo‍—in other words, the end of July and the first part of August.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­8
  • 18.­16
g.­351

Rādhā

Wylie:
  • dga’ mo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rādhā AD

An incarnation of a goddess as a milkmaid, who became Kṛṣṇa’s lover.

(Toh 556 Degé: rgan’ mo.)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­69
  • g.­173
  • g.­425
g.­352

Radiance of a Hundred Suns’ Illuminating Essence

Wylie:
  • nyi ma brgya’i ’od zer snang ba’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ་བརྒྱའི་འོད་ཟེར་སྣང་བའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A tathāgata.

(Toh 555: Suvarṇa­śata­prabhā­garbha; gser brgya’i ’od kyi rnying po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­10
g.­353

Radiant Flower Display

Wylie:
  • me tog ’od bkod
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་འོད་བཀོད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555: me tog bkod pa’i ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­24
g.­354

Rāhu

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhu AD

An asura king said to cause eclipses.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­51
g.­355

Rāhula

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan
  • sgra gcan zin
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན།
  • སྒྲ་གཅན་ཟིན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhula AS

Śākyamuni Buddha’s son who became the first novice monk and a prominent member of his monastic saṅgha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89
  • 2.­33
  • 25.­49
g.­356

Rājagṛha

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i khab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་ཁབ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājagṛha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient capital of Magadha prior to its relocation to Pāṭaliputra during the Mauryan dynasty, Rājagṛha is one of the most important locations in Buddhist history. The literature tells us that the Buddha and his saṅgha spent a considerable amount of time in residence in and around Rājagṛha‍—in nearby places, such as the Vulture Peak Mountain (Gṛdhrakūṭaparvata), a major site of the Mahāyāna sūtras, and the Bamboo Grove (Veṇuvana)‍—enjoying the patronage of King Bimbisāra and then of his son King Ajātaśatru. Rājagṛha is also remembered as the location where the first Buddhist monastic council was held after the Buddha Śākyamuni passed into parinirvāṇa. Now known as Rajgir and located in the modern Indian state of Bihar.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­35-36
  • i.­43
  • 1.­1
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­5
  • 4.­3
  • g.­521
g.­357

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­18
  • 20.­50
g.­358

Ralpachen

Wylie:
  • ral pa can
Tibetan:
  • རལ་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A king of Tibet, born ca. 806. His formal name was Tritsuk Detsen (khri gtsug lde btsan), and he reigned from 815 to 838.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • n.­550
  • g.­220
g.­359

rasāyana

Wylie:
  • sman bcud kyis len
Tibetan:
  • སྨན་བཅུད་ཀྱིས་ལེན།
Sanskrit:
  • rasāyana AD

The extraction of the elixir of life from herbs or minerals.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­90
g.­360

Ratibala

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba’i stobs
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བའི་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratibala AD

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­361

Ratnagarbha

Wylie:
  • rin chen snying po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnagarbha AD

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­362

Ratnagarbha

Wylie:
  • rin chen snying po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnagarbha AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­13
g.­363

Ratnakeśa

Wylie:
  • rin chen skra
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་སྐྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnakeśa AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: rin chen gtsug phud)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­364

Ratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin chen tog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaketu AS

The principal buddha of the southern direction.

See also Toh 555, g.­376 .

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 1.­16
  • 2.­5
  • 5.­69
  • 8.­8
  • 17.­14
  • 17.­16
g.­365

Ratnaketu

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i tog
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • —

One of the bodhisattvas present at Vulture Peak.

In Toh 555 the bodhisattva’s name is Ratnadhvaja (rin po che’i rgyal mtshan).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­4
g.­366

Ratna­kusuma­guṇa­sāgara­vaiḍūrya­kanaka­giri­suvarṇa­kāñcana­prabhāsaśrī

Wylie:
  • rin chen me tog yon tan rgya mtsho bai DUr+ya dang gser gyi ri kha dog bzang po gser du snang ba’i dpal
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་མེ་ཏོག་ཡོན་ཏན་རྒྱ་མཚོ་བཻ་ཌཱུརྱ་དང་གསེར་གྱི་རི་ཁ་དོག་བཟང་པོ་གསེར་དུ་སྣང་བའི་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­kusuma­guṇa­sāgara­vaiḍūrya­kanaka­giri­suvarṇa­kāñcana­prabhāsaśrī AS

(Toh 555: Vaiḍūrya­kanaka­giri­ratna­kusuma­prabhā­śrīguṇa­sāgara; bai DUr+ya dang gser gyi ri bo rin po che’i me tog snang ba spal gyi yon tan rgya mtsho)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­78
  • 16.­2
g.­367

Ratnaprabha

Wylie:
  • rin chen ’od
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaprabha AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­21
g.­368

Ratnārcī

Wylie:
  • rin chen ’od ’phro
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་འོད་འཕྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnārcī AD

A goddess who later becomes the bodhisattva Cittaratnārcī.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • i.­62-64
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­17
  • 10.­20-22
  • 10.­33-34
  • 10.­36-40
  • 10.­42
  • g.­139
g.­369

Ratnārci

Wylie:
  • rin chen ’od ’phro
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་འོད་འཕྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnārci

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­370

Ratnārci

Wylie:
  • rin chen ’od ’phro
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་འོད་འཕྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnārci

A buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­46
  • 5.­82
  • 5.­84
  • g.­164
g.­371

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin AS

A buddha in the distant past.

(Toh 555: rin chen gtsug phud)

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­84
  • i.­88-89
  • 8.­19
  • 17.­6
  • 21.­5
  • 21.­27
  • 24.­1-2
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­50
  • g.­471
g.­372

Ratnoccaya

Wylie:
  • rin chen sogs pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་སོགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnoccaya AS

A dharmabhāṇaka in the distant past who eventually became the Buddha Akṣobhya.

(Yongle, Lithang, Peking, Narthang, and Choné: rin chen sogs, rin chen sogs pa. Toh 555: rin chen brtsegs pa)

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • i.­84
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­9-14
  • 21.­18-19
  • 21.­21
  • 21.­29
  • n.­438
g.­373

realgar

Wylie:
  • ni ldong ros
Tibetan:
  • ནི་ལྡོང་རོས།
Sanskrit:
  • manaḥśilā AS

Arsenic sulphide, which consists of bright orange-red soft crystals, is also called “ruby sulphur” and “ruby of arsenic.” A number of Sanskrit synonyms include yavāgraja, pākya, manoguptā, nāgajihivikā, golā, śilā, kunṭī, and naipālī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­6
g.­374

Remover of Affliction

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs nad sel
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་ནད་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A deva.

(Toh 555: nyon mongs pa yongs su spangs pa; Degé Toh 556: nyong mongs nad sel)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­375

Renowned King Virtuous Stainless Light

Wylie:
  • dge ’od dri ma med par grags pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འོད་དྲི་མ་མེད་པར་གྲགས་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555: legs ’od dri med grags pa’i rgyal po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­26
g.­376

retention

Wylie:
  • gzungs
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhāraṇī AS

An exceptional power of mental retention. The term dhāraṇī has the sense of something that “holds” or “retains,” and it can also refer to a verbal expression of the teachings‍—an incantation, spell, or mnemonic formula that distills and “holds” essential points of the Dharma and is used by practitioners to attain mundane and supramundane goals.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 3.­39
  • 4.­46
  • 6.­50
  • 6.­60
  • 12.­124
  • 15.­1-2
g.­377

River Holder

Wylie:
  • klung ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུང་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A nāga king.

(Toh 555: chu’i rgyu ’dzin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­7
g.­378

Royal Light

Wylie:
  • rgyal po ’od
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • śataraśmi AS

A nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­20
g.­379

ṛṣi

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ancient Indian spiritual title, often translated as “sage” or “seer.” The title is particularly used for divinely inspired individuals credited with creating the foundations of Indian culture. The term is also applied to Śākyamuni and other realized Buddhist figures.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • 2.­60
  • 12.­61-63
  • 15.­60
  • 15.­70
  • 15.­77
  • 15.­100
  • 19.­15
  • 26.­9
g.­380

Ruciraketu

Wylie:
  • mdzes pa’i tog
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་པའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ruciraketu AD

The name of a bodhisattva.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • s.­2
  • i.­3
  • i.­36
  • i.­38-39
  • i.­43
  • i.­82
  • i.­87
  • i.­92
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­6-8
  • 2.­18-19
  • 2.­26-27
  • 2.­67-68
  • 2.­120-121
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­3-4
  • 4.­106
  • 7.­38
  • 17.­20
  • 23.­2
  • 28.­1
  • n.­471
  • g.­141
  • g.­382
  • g.­383
  • g.­455
  • g.­460
g.­381

Ruciraketu

Wylie:
  • mdzes pa’i tog
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་པའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ruciraketu

The name of a prince. Son of the king Balendraketu.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­3-4
g.­382

Rūpyaketu

Wylie:
  • dngul tog
Tibetan:
  • དངུལ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • rūpyaketu AD

The older son of the bodhisattva Ruciraketu.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • 7.­39
  • 23.­3
  • n.­471
  • g.­455
g.­383

Rūpyaprabha

Wylie:
  • dngul ’od
Tibetan:
  • དངུལ་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • rūpyaprabha AS

The younger son of the bodhisattva Ruciraketu.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • 7.­39
  • 23.­4
  • g.­141
g.­384

Sadāprarudita

Wylie:
  • rtag tu ngu
Tibetan:
  • རྟག་ཏུ་ངུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sadāprarudita AO

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A bodhisattva famous for his quest for the Dharma and for his devotion to the teacher. It is told that Sadāprarudita, in order to make offerings to the bodhisattva Dharmodgata and request the Prajñāpāramitā teachings, sets out to sell his own flesh and blood. After receiving a first set of teachings, Sadāprarudita waits seven years for the bodhisattva Dharmodgata, his teacher, to emerge from meditation. When he receives signs this is about to happen, he wishes to prepare the ground for the teachings by settling the dust. Māra makes all the water disappear, so Sadāprarudita decides to use his own blood to settle the dust. He is said to be practicing in the presence of Buddha Bhīṣma­garjita­nirghoṣa­svara. His name means "Ever Weeping", on account of the numerous tears he shed until he found the teachings.

His story is told in detail by the Buddha in The Perfection of Wisdom in Eighteen Thousand Lines (Toh 10, ch. 85–86), and can be found quoted in several works, such as The Words of My Perfect Teacher (kun bzang bla ma’i zhal lung) by Patrul Rinpoche.

In this text:

(Toh 555: rtag tu bshums)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­23
g.­385

saffron

Wylie:
  • gur gum
Tibetan:
  • གུར་གུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṅkuma AS

Crocus sativus.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­7
  • g.­209
g.­386

Sāgara

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgara AS

The principal nāga king in The King of Samādhis Sūtra and The Questions of the Nāga King Sāgara. This is also said to be another name for Vaṛuna, the god of the oceans.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 14.­20
  • 22.­27
  • 22.­49
g.­387

Sāgara

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgara AS

A bodhisattva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­44
g.­388

sage

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni AS

A title that, like “buddha,” is given to those who have attained realization through their own contemplation and not by divine revelation.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­10-11
  • 26.­26
  • g.­297
  • g.­379
g.­389

Sahā

Wylie:
  • mi mjed
Tibetan:
  • མི་མཇེད།
Sanskrit:
  • sahā AS

Indian Buddhist name for either the four-continent world in which the Buddha Śākyamuni appeared, or a universe of a thousand million such worlds. The name Sahā possibly derives from the Sanskrit √sah, “to bear, endure, or withstand.” It is often interpreted as alluding to the inhabitants of this world having to endure suffering. The Tibetan translation, mi mjed, follows along the same lines. It literally means “not unbearable,” in the sense that beings here are able to bear the suffering they experience.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­53
  • 10.­17
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 14.­11
  • 15.­77
  • 15.­120
  • g.­71
g.­390

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the gods in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three (trāyastriṃśa). Alternatively known as Indra, the deity that is called “lord of the gods” dwells on the summit of Mount Sumeru and wields the thunderbolt. The Tibetan translation brgya byin (meaning “one hundred sacrifices”) is based on an etymology that śakra is an abbreviation of śata-kratu, one who has performed a hundred sacrifices. Each world with a central Sumeru has a Śakra. Also known by other names such as Kauśika, Devendra, and Śacipati.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45-46
  • i.­48
  • i.­75
  • 3.­64
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­53
  • 5.­78
  • 5.­85
  • 5.­87
  • 5.­89
  • 5.­93
  • 10.­51
  • 12.­28
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­61-63
  • 14.­14
  • 14.­24
  • 14.­26
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­74
  • 21.­33
  • g.­71
  • g.­208
  • g.­233
  • g.­443
  • g.­473
  • g.­526
g.­391

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An epithet for the historical Buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama: he was a muni (“sage”) from the Śākya clan. He is counted as the fourth of the first four buddhas of the present Good Eon, the other three being Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, and Kāśyapa. He will be followed by Maitreya, the next buddha in this eon.

Located in 38 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • i.­84
  • i.­92-93
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­6-7
  • 2.­9-11
  • 2.­13
  • 2.­18-19
  • 2.­26-29
  • 2.­67
  • 5.­68
  • 8.­6
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­28
  • 21.­28
  • 22.­8
  • 26.­142
  • 29.­5
  • n.­537
  • g.­71
  • g.­141
  • g.­172
  • g.­355
  • g.­379
  • g.­389
  • g.­437
  • g.­455
  • g.­460
  • g.­501
g.­392

sal

Wylie:
  • sA la
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāla AS
  • sāla

Shorea robusta. The dominant tree in the forests where it occurs.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­16-17
  • 7.­13
  • 21.­18
g.­393

Śālendra­dhvajāgravatī

Wylie:
  • sA la’i dbang po mthon po’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོ་མཐོན་པོའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • śālendra­dhvajāgravatī AS

A world realm in the distant future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 23.­13
g.­394

samādhi

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • i.­52
  • 1.­12
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­38-39
  • 3.­41-42
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­59
  • 4.­46
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­68
  • 6.­24
  • 6.­50
  • 6.­54
  • 6.­79-88
  • 12.­102
  • 15.­44
  • 28.­6
  • 29.­5
  • g.­39
  • g.­78
  • g.­332
  • g.­431
g.­395

Samantabhadra

Wylie:
  • kun tu bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantabhadra AD

Presently classed as one of the eight principal bodhisattvas, he is distinct from the primordial buddha with the same name in the Tibetan Nyingma tradition. He is prominent in The Stem Array (Gaṇḍavyūha, Toh 44-45), and also in The White Lotus of the Good Dharma (Toh 113, Saddharma­puṇḍarīka) and The White Lotus of Great Compassion (Toh 111, Mahā­karuṇā­puṇḍarīka­sūtra).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­35
  • 22.­19
g.­396

Samantaprabha

Wylie:
  • kun tu ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • samantaprabha AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­14
g.­397

Samantāvabhāsa

Wylie:
  • kun tu snang ba
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantāvabhāsa AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­15
g.­398

Samantāvalokiteśvara

Wylie:
  • kun tu spyan ras gzigs dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་སྤྱན་རས་གཟིགས་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • samantāvalokiteśvara AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: kun tu spyan ras gzigs kyi dbang po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­44
g.­399

samāpatti

Wylie:
  • snyoms par ’jug pa
Tibetan:
  • སྙོམས་པར་འཇུག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • samāpatti

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit literally means “attainment,” and is used to refer specifically to meditative attainment and to particular meditative states. The Tibetan translators interpreted it as sama-āpatti, which suggests the idea of “equal” or “level”; however, they also parsed it as sam-āpatti, in which case it would have the sense of “concentration” or “absorption,” much like samādhi, but with the added sense of “attainment.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­24
g.­400

Saṃjñeya

Wylie:
  • yang dag shes
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་ཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjñeya AS

A yakṣa general.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­81
  • 12.­32
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­4
  • 19.­7
  • 19.­9
  • 19.­15-17
  • 22.­26
  • 22.­39
  • n.­457
g.­401

saṃsāra

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃsāra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A state of involuntary existence conditioned by afflicted mental states and the imprint of past actions, characterized by suffering in a cycle of life, death, and rebirth. On its reversal, the contrasting state of nirvāṇa is attained, free from suffering and the processes of rebirth.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­76
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­108
  • 2.­116
  • 2.­119
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­42
  • 3.­51
  • 3.­60
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­63
  • 4.­69
  • 4.­99
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­57
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­36
  • 6.­58
  • 6.­62
  • 6.­133
  • 6.­148
  • 9.­21
  • 10.­6
  • 10.­43
  • 12.­27-28
  • 12.­50
  • 12.­125
  • 15.­21
  • 25.­52
  • 26.­85
  • g.­327
g.­402

Saṃvara

Wylie:
  • bde mchog
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • saṃvara AS

An asura king.

(Toh 555: sdom po pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­51
g.­403

samyaksaṃbuddha

Wylie:
  • yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་རྫོགས་པའི་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • samyaksaṃbuddha AD

“Perfectly realized one.” A buddha who teaches the Dharma, as opposed to a pratyekabuddha, who does not teach.

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­7
  • 2.­29
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­81
  • 2.­93
  • 2.­118
  • 5.­36-38
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­79-81
  • 5.­84
  • 7.­41
  • 10.­40
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­28
  • 12.­63-64
  • 14.­1
  • 16.­2
  • 17.­2
  • 23.­2-4
  • 23.­13
  • 24.­1-2
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­50
  • 26.­84
g.­404

sandalwood

Wylie:
  • tsan+dan
Tibetan:
  • ཙནྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • candana AS

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­73
  • 15.­6
  • 21.­16
  • 26.­74
  • g.­282
g.­405

saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅgha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Though often specifically reserved for the monastic community, this term can be applied to any of the four Buddhist communities‍—monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen‍—as well as to identify the different groups of practitioners, like the community of bodhisattvas or the community of śrāvakas. It is also the third of the Three Jewels (triratna) of Buddhism: the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Community.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­10
  • 5.­57
  • 6.­144
  • 15.­34
  • 15.­94
  • 18.­25
  • 21.­8-9
  • 26.­16
  • n.­102
  • n.­150
  • g.­117
  • g.­263
  • g.­355
  • g.­512
g.­406

Sarasvatī

Wylie:
  • dbyangs can
Tibetan:
  • དབྱངས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sarasvatī AD

The goddess of wisdom, learning, and music.

(Toh 555: spobs pa’i lha mo)

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­76-77
  • i.­85
  • 1.­26
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­22-25
  • 15.­28
  • 15.­32
  • 15.­35-36
  • 15.­48
  • 15.­53-54
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­84
  • 15.­91
  • 15.­93
  • 15.­108
  • 15.­111
  • 15.­131
  • 15.­133-134
  • 22.­35
  • 22.­37
  • 22.­56
  • 29.­13
g.­407

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the principal śrāvaka disciples of the Buddha, he was renowned for his discipline and for having been praised by the Buddha as foremost of the wise (often paired with Maudgalyā­yana, who was praised as foremost in the capacity for miraculous powers). His father, Tiṣya, to honor Śāriputra’s mother, Śārikā, named him Śāradvatīputra, or, in its contracted form, Śāriputra, meaning “Śārikā’s Son.”

Located in 46 passages in the translation:

  • i.­45
  • i.­72
  • 1.­2
  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­15
  • 5.­25-28
  • 5.­39-43
  • 5.­46
  • 5.­50-56
  • 5.­70-76
  • 13.­2-4
  • 13.­6-9
  • 13.­11-14
  • 15.­117
  • n.­282
  • n.­537
  • g.­42
  • g.­264
g.­408

Sarva­sattva­priya­darśana

Wylie:
  • sems can thams cad kyis mthong na dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་ཅན་ཐམས་ཅད་ཀྱིས་མཐོང་ན་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarva­sattva­priya­darśana AD

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­35
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­55
g.­409

Sātāgiri

Wylie:
  • bde ba’i ri nyid
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བའི་རི་ཉིད།
Sanskrit:
  • sātāgiri AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: bde ba’i ri)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­47
g.­410

Śatakiraṇa

Wylie:
  • ’od zer brgya pa
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་བརྒྱ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śatakiraṇa AS

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­411

Satamapati

Wylie:
  • rgyun gyi bdag po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་གྱི་བདག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • satamapati

A god who is the king of lightning in the northern direction.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­2
g.­412

sensation

Wylie:
  • tshor ba
Tibetan:
  • ཚོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vedanā AS

The seventh of the twelve phases of dependent origination and the second of the five skandhas. It refers to pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral sensations as a result of sensory experiences.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­20
  • 24.­5-6
  • 25.­25
  • n.­73-74
  • g.­39
g.­413

seven jewels

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna bdun
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptaratna AS

When associated with the seven heavenly bodies, and therefore the seven days of the week, these are ruby for the sun, moonstone or pearl for the moon, coral for Mars, emerald for Mercury, yellow sapphire for Jupiter, diamond for Venus, and blue sapphire for Saturn. There are variant lists not associated with the heavenly bodies but retaining the number seven, which include gold, silver, and so on. In association with a cakravartin, the seven jewels can refer, according to the Abhidharma, to his magical wheel, elephant, horse, wish-fulfilling jewel, queen, minister, and leading householder. In the Tibetan mandala-offering practice, the householder is replaced by a general.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­51-52
  • 10.­49
  • 13.­13
  • 18.­14
  • 21.­25-26
g.­414

seven precious materials

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna bdun
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptaratna AS
Chinese:
  • 七寶

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The set of seven precious materials or substances includes a range of precious metals and gems, but their exact list varies. The set often consists of gold, silver, beryl, crystal, red pearls, emeralds, and white coral, but may also contain lapis lazuli, ruby, sapphire, chrysoberyl, diamonds, etc. The term is frequently used in the sūtras to exemplify preciousness, wealth, and beauty, and can describe treasures, offering materials, or the features of architectural structures such as stūpas, palaces, thrones, etc. The set is also used to describe the beauty and prosperity of buddha realms and the realms of the gods.

In other contexts, the term saptaratna can also refer to the seven precious possessions of a cakravartin or to a set of seven precious moral qualities.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­72
  • 10.­19
  • 10.­27
  • 12.­27
  • 17.­1
  • 26.­145
g.­415

shami

Wylie:
  • sha myi
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་མྱི།
Sanskrit:
  • śamī AS

Prosopis cineraria. A tree believed to be auspicious due to the power of its purification properties.

(Toh 555: sha mi; Toh 556 sha myi)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­416

Shigatsé

Wylie:
  • gzhis ka rtse
Tibetan:
  • གཞིས་ཀ་རྩེ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The principal town in the Tsang region of central Tibet, which was the capital during a period of Tibetan history.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­27
g.­417

Siṃha

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­418

Siṃhamati

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhamati AD

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­419

sixty qualities

Wylie:
  • yan lag drug cu
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་དྲུག་ཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṣaṣṭāṅga AD
  • ṣaṣṭyaṅga AD

The Buddha’s speech is said to have sixty aspects and sometimes sixty-four. The list of sixty, as given in Maitreyanātha’s Mahāyāna­sūtrālaṃkāra, are (1) ripening, (2) smooth, (3) direct, (4) cogent, (5) correct, (6) stainless, (7) clear, (8) harmonious, (9) proper, (10) undefeatable, (11) meaningful, (12) taming, (13) gentle, (14) kind, (15) completely taming, (16) pleasing, (17) refreshing, (18) soothing, (19) gladdening, (20) blissful, (21) fulfilling, (22) worthwhile, (23) meaningful, (24) comprehensive, (25) reassuring, (26) inspiring, (27) enlightening, (28) instructive, (29) logical, (30) pertinent, (31) exact, (32) powerful, (33) fearless, (34) unfathomable, (35) majestic, (36) melodious, (37) sustaining, (38) long-lasting, (39) auspicious, (40) authoritative, (41) exhortative, (42) selfless, (43) confident, (44) omniscient, (45) whole, (46) complete, (47) certain, (48) desireless, (49) exhilarating, (50) pervasive, (51) stimulating, (52) continuous, (53) consistent, (54) multilingual, (55) adaptive, (56) reliable, (57) timely, (58) calm, (59) pervasive, and (60) perfecting.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 27.­4
g.­420

Skanda

Wylie:
  • skem byed
Tibetan:
  • སྐེམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • skanda AD

The Indian god of war.

(Toh 555: phrag chen)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­101
  • 22.­37
g.­421

Soma

Wylie:
  • zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • soma AD

The deity of the moon.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 22.­37
  • g.­526
g.­422

spikenard

Wylie:
  • na la da
Tibetan:
  • ན་ལ་ད།
Sanskrit:
  • nalada AS

Nardostachys jatamansi. Also called “nard,” “nardin,” and “muskroot.” It is of the valerian family and grows in the Himalayas. Its rhizome is the source of an aromatic, amber-colored oil.

Bagchi edition: narada.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­423

śrāvaka

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1-3
  • 1.­11
  • 2.­37
  • 3.­8
  • 3.­57
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­93
  • 5.­23
  • 5.­80
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­18
  • 8.­5
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­95
  • 21.­8-9
  • n.­64
  • g.­39
  • g.­264
  • g.­315
  • g.­405
  • g.­424
  • g.­430
g.­424

Śrāvakayāna

Wylie:
  • nyan thos kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvakayāna

The vehicle comprising the teaching of the śrāvakas.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­27-28
  • 5.­36-38
  • 5.­43
  • 5.­46
  • 5.­55-56
  • g.­48
g.­425

Śrīmatī

Wylie:
  • dpal gyi blo gros
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་གྱི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrīmatī AD

A name of Rādhā, Kṛṣṇa’s consort.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­103
g.­426

state

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana

This term has various meanings according to context. Here in this sūtra it is used to refer to the four meditative states associated with the formless realm: (1) infinite space, (2) infinite consciousness, (3) nothingness, and (4) neither perception nor nonperception. In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena. In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • g.­427
  • g.­428
  • g.­429
  • g.­465
g.­427

state of infinite space

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ mtha’ yas skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་མཐའ་ཡས་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ākāśānantyāyatana AD

The lowest of the four formless realms. See also “state.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­21
g.­428

state of neither perception nor nonperception

Wylie:
  • ’du shes med ’du shes med min skye mched
Tibetan:
  • འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་མིན་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • naiva­saṃjñānāsaṃjñāyatana AD

The highest of the four formless realms. See also “state.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­21
  • 12.­33
g.­429

state of nothingness

Wylie:
  • ci yang med pa’i skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ཅི་ཡང་མེད་པའི་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ākiṃcanyāyatana AD

The second highest of the four formless realms. See also “state.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­21
g.­430

stream entrant

Wylie:
  • rgyun du zhugs pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་དུ་ཞུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • srotāpanna AD

The first of four stages of spiritual accomplishment on the śrāvaka path: stream entrant, once-returner, non-returner, and arhat.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­22
  • g.­265
  • g.­501
g.­431

strengths

Wylie:
  • stobs
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • bala AS

The five strengths are a stronger form of the five powers: faith, mindfulness, diligence, samādhi, and wisdom.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­46
  • 4.­56
  • 5.­23
  • g.­39
  • g.­464
g.­432

stūpa

Wylie:
  • mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • stūpa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Tibetan translates both stūpa and caitya with the same word, mchod rten, meaning “basis” or “recipient” of “offerings” or “veneration.” Pali: cetiya.

A caitya, although often synonymous with stūpa, can also refer to any site, sanctuary or shrine that is made for veneration, and may or may not contain relics.

A stūpa, literally “heap” or “mound,” is a mounded or circular structure usually containing relics of the Buddha or the masters of the past. It is considered to be a sacred object representing the awakened mind of a buddha, but the symbolism of the stūpa is complex, and its design varies throughout the Buddhist world. Stūpas continue to be erected today as objects of veneration and merit making.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­90
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­72
  • 6.­149
  • 18.­16
  • 22.­8-9
  • 22.­28
  • 22.­31
  • 26.­10-12
  • 26.­145
  • 26.­148
g.­433

Śubhakṛtsna

Wylie:
  • dge rgyas
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • śubhakṛtsna AD

“Vast Goodness.” The highest of the three paradises that correspond to the third dhyāna in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­20
g.­434

Sūciroma

Wylie:
  • khab kyi spu
Tibetan:
  • ཁབ་ཀྱི་སྤུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūciroma AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: khab spu)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­435

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • shin tu mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana AD

In the Sarvāstivāda tradition, this is the second highest of the Śuddhāvāsa paradises, the highest paradises in the form realm. In this sūtra it is the fourth highest.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • n.­133
  • g.­443
g.­436

Śuddhāvāsa

Wylie:
  • gtsang ma’i gnas
Tibetan:
  • གཙང་མའི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The five Pure Abodes are the highest heavens of the Form Realm (rūpadhātu). They are called “pure abodes” because ordinary beings (pṛthagjana; so so’i skye bo) cannot be born there; only those who have achieved the fruit of a non-returner (anāgāmin; phyir mi ’ong) can be born there. A summary presentation of them is found in the third chapter of Vasubandhu's Abhidharmakośa, although they are repeatedly mentioned as a set in numerous sūtras, tantras, and vinaya texts.

The five Pure Abodes are the last five of the seventeen levels of the Form Realm. Specifically, they are the last five of the eight levels of the upper Form Realm‍—which corresponds to the fourth meditative concentration (dhyāna; bsam gtan)‍—all of which are described as “immovable” (akopya; mi g.yo ba) since they are never destroyed during the cycles of the destruction and reformation of a world system. In particular, the five are Abṛha (mi che ba), the inferior heaven; Atapa (mi gdung ba), the heaven of no torment; Sudṛśa (gya nom snang), the heaven of sublime appearances; Sudarśana (shin tu mthong), the heaven of the most beautiful to behold; and Akaniṣṭha (’og min), the highest heaven.

Yaśomitra explains their names, stating: (1) because those who abide there can only remain for a fixed amount of time, before they are plucked out (√bṛh, bṛṃhanti) of that heaven, or because it is not as extensive (abṛṃhita) as the others in the pure realms, that heaven is called the inferior heaven (abṛha; mi che ba); (2) since the afflictions can no longer torment (√tap, tapanti) those who reside there because of their having attained a particular samādhi, or because their state of mind is virtuous, they no longer torment (√tap, tāpayanti) others, this heaven, consequently, is called the heaven of no torment (atapa; mi gdung ba); (3) since those who reside there have exceptional (suṣṭhu) vision because what they see (√dṛś, darśana) is utterly pure, that heaven is called the heaven of sublime appearances (sudṛśa; gya nom snang); (4) because those who reside there are beautiful gods, that heaven is called the heaven of the most beautiful to behold (sudarśana; shin tu mthong); and (5) since it is not lower (na kaniṣṭhā) than any other heaven because there is no other place superior to it, this heaven is called the highest heaven (akaniṣṭha; ’og min) since it is the uppermost.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­119
  • g.­37
  • g.­43
  • g.­48
  • g.­435
  • g.­439
g.­437

Śuddhodana

Wylie:
  • zas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • ཟས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhodana AD

The Buddha Śākyamuni’s father.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­89-90
  • 25.­46
  • 26.­143
g.­438

śūdra

Wylie:
  • dmangs rigs
Tibetan:
  • དམངས་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śūdra AD

The fourth and lowest of the classes in the caste system of India. It generally covers the laboring class.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­111
g.­439

Sudṛśa

Wylie:
  • gya nom snang ba
Tibetan:
  • གྱ་ནོམ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudṛśa AD

“Perfect Light.” In the Sarvāstivāda tradition, this is the third highest of the five Śuddhāvāsa paradises, the highest paradises in the form realm. In this sūtra it is the lowest of those five.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • n.­133
g.­440

sugata

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the standard epithets of the buddhas. A recurrent explanation offers three different meanings for su- that are meant to show the special qualities of “accomplishment of one’s own purpose” (svārthasampad) for a complete buddha. Thus, the Sugata is “well” gone, as in the expression su-rūpa (“having a good form”); he is gone “in a way that he shall not come back,” as in the expression su-naṣṭa-jvara (“a fever that has utterly gone”); and he has gone “without any remainder” as in the expression su-pūrṇa-ghaṭa (“a pot that is completely full”). According to Buddhaghoṣa, the term means that the way the Buddha went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su) and where he went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su).

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­69
  • 5.­73
  • 5.­79
  • 7.­12
  • 7.­22
  • 10.­40
  • 13.­6
  • 21.­5
  • 23.­2
  • 23.­4
  • 23.­13
  • 24.­1
g.­441

Sukhavihāra

Wylie:
  • bde bar gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sukhavihāra AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: Saṃtiṣṭha; rab gnas)

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­58
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­42-45
g.­442

Sumati

Wylie:
  • legs pa’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་པའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sumati AS

A bodhisattva.

Toh 556: dge ba’i blo gros.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­39
  • 14.­9
  • n.­286
  • n.­333
g.­443

Sumeru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumeru AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­11
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­71
  • 5.­72
  • 6.­5
  • 12.­33
  • 12.­104
  • 15.­124
  • 27.­5
  • 28.­4
  • 28.­8
  • 29.­3
  • n.­38
  • n.­59
  • g.­17
  • g.­82
  • g.­112
  • g.­208
  • g.­390
  • g.­473
  • g.­503
g.­444

Supratiṣṭha

Wylie:
  • rab tu gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • supratiṣṭha AD

A bodhisattva.

(Toh 555: shin tu bde bar gnas pa)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­25
g.­445

Supreme Auspicious Essence

Wylie:
  • bkra shis mchog gi snying po
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་མཆོག་གི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Licchavī youth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­446

Supreme Incense Heap

Wylie:
  • spos mchog brtsegs
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་མཆོག་བརྩེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555 Degé: spobs brtsegs; Yongle, Peking, and Narthang: spos brtsegs; Lithang and Choné: stobs brtse)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­16
g.­447

Supreme King

Wylie:
  • rab mchog rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • རབ་མཆོག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

(Toh 555: mchog tu rnam par rgyal ba’i rgyal po)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­29
  • 12.­115-116
  • 20.­3
g.­448

Sureśvaraprabha

Wylie:
  • lha’i dbang phyug ’od
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་དབང་ཕྱུག་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • sureśvaraprabha AS

A king in the distant past.

(Toh 555: lha’i dbang phyug gi ’od)

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • i.­88-89
  • 24.­2-3
  • 24.­5
  • 24.­23
  • 24.­27
  • 25.­1
  • 25.­14-15
  • 25.­30-31
  • 25.­33-37
  • 25.­43
  • 25.­45
g.­449

Sūrya

Wylie:
  • nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrya AS

The god of the sun.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­85
  • 22.­74-75
  • n.­433
  • g.­526
g.­450

Sūryamitra

Wylie:
  • gnyen bshes
Tibetan:
  • གཉེན་བཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryamitra AS

A yakṣa king.

(Perhaps the orginal Tibetan was nyi bshes. Lithang and Peking & Toh 557: gnyis bshes; Yongle: gnyi bshes; Toh 555: nyi ma’i gnyen)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­451

Sūryaprabha

Wylie:
  • nyi ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryaprabha AD

A deva.

(Toh 555: nyi ma’i ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­6
g.­452

Susaṃbhava

Wylie:
  • legs par byung ba
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་པར་བྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • susaṃbhava AS

The Buddha’s previous life as a cakravartin in the distant past.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­84
  • 21.­5
  • 21.­13-14
  • 21.­22
  • 21.­24
  • 21.­27-29
  • 21.­35
g.­453

Sustaining the Saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun skyong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Licchavī youth.

(Toh 555: dge ’dun skyabs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­454

Suvarṇabhujendra

Wylie:
  • gser gyi lag pa’i dbang po
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་ལག་པའི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇabhujendra AD

A king in the distant past.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­2
  • 7.­38
  • g.­228
  • g.­229
g.­455

Suvarṇa­jambu­dhvaja­kāñcanābha

Wylie:
  • gser ’dzam bu’i gser gyi rgyal mtshan gyi ’od
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་འཛམ་བུའི་གསེར་གྱི་རྒྱལ་མཚན་གྱི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇa­jambu­dhvaja­kāñcanābha AS

A buddha in the distant future who is Rūpyaketu, the son of Ruciraketu, in the time of Śākyamuni.

(Toh 555: Suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa; gser dang rin po che’i ri bo’i rgyal po)

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • 23.­3-4
g.­456

Suvarṇaprabhā

Wylie:
  • gser du snang ba
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་དུ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇaprabhā AS

A world realm in the distant future.

(Toh 555: gser ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 23.­2
g.­457

Suvarṇa­prabhā­garbha

Wylie:
  • gser du snang ba’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་དུ་སྣང་བའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇa­prabhā­garbha AD

A tathāgata.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­9
g.­458

Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama

Wylie:
  • gser ’od dam pa
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་འོད་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇa­prabhāsottama AD

A bodhisattva with the same name as the title of the sūtra.

(Toh 555: gser gyi ’od)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­21
g.­459

Suvarṇa­puṣpa­jvala­raśmi­ketu

Wylie:
  • gser gyi me tog ’bar ba’i ’od zer gyi tog
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་མེ་ཏོག་འབར་བའི་འོད་ཟེར་གྱི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇa­puṣpa­jvala­raśmi­ketu AD

A tathāgata.

(Toh 555: Suvarṇa­puṣpa­raśmi­dhvaja; gser gyi me tog ’od zer rgyal mtshan)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­12
g.­460

Suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa

Wylie:
  • gser dang rin po che’i ’byung gnas gdugs brtsegs
  • gser ri rin chen ’byung gnas gdugs brtsegs
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་དང་རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་འབྱུང་གནས་གདུགས་བརྩེགས།
  • གསེར་རི་རིན་ཆེན་འབྱུང་གནས་གདུགས་བརྩེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇa­ratnākaracchatra­kūṭa AS

A buddha in the distant future who is the bodhisattva Ruciraketu in the time of Śākyamuni.

(Toh 555: gser gdugs rin po che brtsegs pa)

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­87
  • i.­91
  • 17.­11
  • 23.­2-3
  • 27.­1
  • g.­455
g.­461

Svarṇakeśin

Wylie:
  • gser ’dra’i skra
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་འདྲའི་སྐྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • svarṇakeśin AS

A yakṣa king.

(Toh 555: su bar na dang ke śa (incorrectly dividing the name into two names))

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­45
g.­462

sweet flag

Wylie:
  • shu dag
Tibetan:
  • ཤུ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • vacā AS

Acorus calamus. A plant of marshes and wetlands, native to India. There are a number of variant Sanskrit names for this plant. Its leaves, stem, and roots are used in Āyurvedic medicine.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­5
g.­463

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequently used synonym for buddha. According to different explanations, it can be read as tathā-gata, literally meaning “one who has thus gone,” or as tathā-āgata, “one who has thus come.” Gata, though literally meaning “gone,” is a past passive participle used to describe a state or condition of existence. Tatha­(tā), often rendered as “suchness” or “thusness,” is the quality or condition of things as they really are, which cannot be conveyed in conceptual, dualistic terms. Therefore, this epithet is interpreted in different ways, but in general it implies one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past, or one who has manifested the supreme awakening dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence. It is also often used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 177 passages in the translation:

  • i.­72
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­8
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­5
  • 2.­7-9
  • 2.­18-20
  • 2.­23-30
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­39
  • 2.­57-59
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­66
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­71-72
  • 2.­81
  • 2.­84
  • 2.­89-93
  • 2.­95-102
  • 2.­104
  • 2.­106
  • 2.­108-122
  • 3.­1-4
  • 3.­6
  • 3.­11
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­31
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­46-47
  • 3.­54
  • 3.­57-60
  • 3.­62-63
  • 4.­39
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­93
  • 4.­106
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­25
  • 5.­36-38
  • 5.­51-54
  • 5.­68-69
  • 5.­79-82
  • 5.­84
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­46
  • 6.­131
  • 7.­2
  • 7.­16
  • 10.­40
  • 11.­1
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­27-28
  • 12.­34-36
  • 12.­62-64
  • 12.­105
  • 13.­14
  • 15.­113
  • 16.­1-2
  • 16.­5
  • 17.­2
  • 17.­6-18
  • 18.­11-12
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­8
  • 21.­28-29
  • 23.­2-4
  • 23.­12-13
  • 24.­1-2
  • 25.­22
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­50
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­20
  • 26.­142
  • 27.­1
  • 28.­11
  • 29.­4-5
  • 29.­8
  • n.­50
  • n.­54
  • n.­236
  • n.­241
  • n.­374
  • g.­164
  • g.­215
  • g.­269
  • g.­352
  • g.­457
  • g.­459
  • g.­471
g.­464

ten strengths

Wylie:
  • stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśabala AS

The ten strengths are (1) the knowledge of what is possible; (2) the knowledge of the ripening of karma; (3) the knowledge of the variety of aspirations; (4) the knowledge of the variety of natures; (5) the knowledge of the different levels of capabilities; (6) the knowledge of the destinations of all paths of rebirth; (7) the knowledge of various states of meditation; (8) the knowledge of remembering previous lives; (9) the knowledge of deaths and rebirths; and (10) the knowledge of the cessation of defilements.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­40
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­38
  • 4.­46
  • 4.­60
  • 5.­54
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­36
  • 12.­107
  • 21.­33
  • n.­441
  • g.­132
g.­465

the state of infinite consciousness

Wylie:
  • rnam shes mtha’ yas skye mched
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཤེས་མཐའ་ཡས་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vijñānānantyāyatana AD

The third highest of the four formless realms. See also “state.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­21
g.­466

Thief of All Beings’ Splendor

Wylie:
  • sems can kun gyi gzi ’phrog ma
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་ཅན་ཀུན་གྱི་གཟི་འཕྲོག་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A fierce goddess.

(Toh 555 and Toh 557: sems can kun gyi mdangs ’phrog ma)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­467

thirty-two signs

Wylie:
  • mtshan sum cu rtsa gnyis
Tibetan:
  • མཚན་སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvātriṃśalakṣaṇa AD
  • dvātriṃśallakṣaṇa AD

These are the thirty-two major physical of marks of a great being, namely a buddha or a universal monarch. These are complemented by eighty features.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­4
  • 10.­18
g.­468

three bodies

Wylie:
  • sku gsum
Tibetan:
  • སྐུ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trikāya AD

The three kāyas, or bodies, are the Dharma body, enjoyment body, and emanation body.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • i.­25
  • i.­40
  • 3.­16
  • 3.­19-21
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­71
g.­469

three knowledges

Wylie:
  • rig pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • traividya AD

Knowledge through divine sight (lha’i mig gi shes pa), knowledge through remembering past lives (sngon gyi gnas rjes su dran pa’i rig pa), and the knowledge that defilements have ceased (zag pa zad pa’i rig pa).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­23
g.­470

three worlds

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gsum
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trailokya AS

The three realms of desire, form, and formlessness.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­67
  • 4.­70
  • 7.­10
  • 7.­35
  • 7.­37
  • 12.­37
  • 14.­5
  • 20.­51
  • 20.­68
  • 26.­41
  • n.­439
g.­471

Tip of Brilliant, Precious, Pure Fire

Wylie:
  • dri ma med par ’bar ba rin chen ’od zer snang ba’i tog
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་མེད་པར་འབར་བ་རིན་ཆེན་འོད་ཟེར་སྣང་བའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • —

A tathāgata.

(Toh 555: Vimala­raśmi­ratna­ketu; dri ma med pa’i ’od zer rin po che’i tog. Toh 557: Vimala­jvālā­ratna­suvarṇa­raśmi­prabhā­śikhin; dri ma med par ’bar ba rin chen gser gyi ’od zer snang ba’i rtog. Sanskrit ms.: Ratnaśikhin)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­7
g.­472

tīrthika

Wylie:
  • mu stegs can
Tibetan:
  • མུ་སྟེགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • tīrthika AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Those of other religious or philosophical orders, contemporary with the early Buddhist order, including Jains, Jaṭilas, Ājīvikas, and Cārvākas. Tīrthika (“forder”) literally translates as “one belonging to or associated with (possessive suffix –ika) stairs for landing or for descent into a river,” or “a bathing place,” or “a place of pilgrimage on the banks of sacred streams” (Monier-Williams). The term may have originally referred to temple priests at river crossings or fords where travelers propitiated a deity before crossing. The Sanskrit term seems to have undergone metonymic transfer in referring to those able to ford the turbulent river of saṃsāra (as in the Jain tīrthaṅkaras, “ford makers”), and it came to be used in Buddhist sources to refer to teachers of rival religious traditions. The Sanskrit term is closely rendered by the Tibetan mu stegs pa: “those on the steps (stegs pa) at the edge (mu).”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 2.­19
g.­473

Trāyastriṃśa

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • trāyastriṃśa AS

The paradise of Śakra, also known as Indra, on the summit of Sumeru. The name means “Thirty-Three,” from the thirty-three principal deities that dwell there. The fifth highest of the six paradises in the desire realm.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • i.­86-87
  • i.­89
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­38-39
  • 5.­19
  • 12.­33
  • 15.­123
  • 18.­13
  • 20.­16
  • 20.­23
  • 20.­55
  • 20.­68
  • 22.­26
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­14
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­28-29
  • 25.­43
  • n.­38
  • n.­64
  • n.­392
  • g.­214
  • g.­224
  • g.­390
g.­474

trichiliocosm

Wylie:
  • stong gsum
  • stong gsum gyi stong chen po’i rjig rten gyi khams
Tibetan:
  • སྟོང་གསུམ།
  • སྟོང་གསུམ་གྱི་སྟོང་ཆེན་པོའི་རྗིག་རྟེན་གྱི་ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • tri­sāhasra­mahā­sāhasra­loka­dhātu AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The largest universe described in Buddhist cosmology. This term, in Abhidharma cosmology, refers to 1,000³ world systems, i.e., 1,000 “dichiliocosms” or “two thousand great thousand world realms” (dvi­sāhasra­mahā­sāhasra­lokadhātu), which are in turn made up of 1,000 first-order world systems, each with its own Mount Sumeru, continents, sun and moon, etc.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 2.­5
  • 4.­9
  • 5.­40
  • 5.­51-52
  • 5.­72
  • 6.­37-38
  • 9.­29
  • 9.­31
  • 12.­33-34
  • 12.­109
  • 13.­13
  • 15.­45
  • 15.­97
  • 15.­120
  • 21.­14
g.­475

Trisong Detsen

Wylie:
  • ’khri srong lde btsan
Tibetan:
  • འཁྲི་སྲོང་ལྡེ་བཙན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

King of Tibet who reigned ca. 742/55–798/804 ᴄᴇ.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­220
g.­476

Tuṣita

Wylie:
  • dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tuṣita AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Tuṣita (or sometimes Saṃtuṣita), literally “Joyous” or “Contented,” is one of the six heavens of the desire realm (kāmadhātu). In standard classifications, such as the one in the Abhidharmakośa, it is ranked as the fourth of the six counting from below. This god realm is where all future buddhas are said to dwell before taking on their final rebirth prior to awakening. There, the Buddha Śākyamuni lived his preceding life as the bodhisattva Śvetaketu. When departing to take birth in this world, he appointed the bodhisattva Maitreya, who will be the next buddha of this eon, as his Dharma regent in Tuṣita. For an account of the Buddha’s previous life in Tuṣita, see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 2.12, and for an account of Maitreya’s birth in Tuṣita and a description of this realm, see The Sūtra on Maitreya’s Birth in the Heaven of Joy, (Toh 199).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 15.­122
g.­477

twelve forms of the teaching

Wylie:
  • gsung rab yan lag bcu gnyis
Tibetan:
  • གསུང་རབ་ཡན་ལག་བཅུ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The classification of all aspects of the Buddha’s teachings into twelve types: sūtra, geya, vyākaraṇa, gāthā, udāna, nidāna, avadāna, itivṛttaka, jātaka, vaipulya, adbhutadharma, and upadeśa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­110
g.­478

twelve phases of dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba yan lag bcu gnyis
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ་ཡན་ལག་བཅུ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvādaśāṅga­pratītya­samutpāda AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The principle of dependent origination asserts that nothing exists independently of other factors, the reason for this being that things and events come into existence only by dependence on the aggregation of multiple causes and conditions. In general, the processes of cyclic existence, through which the external world and the sentient beings within it revolve in a continuous cycle of suffering, propelled by the propensities of past actions and their interaction with afflicted mental states, originate dependent on the sequential unfolding of twelve links: (1) fundamental ignorance, (2) formative predispositions, (3) consciousness, (4) name and form, (5) sense field, (6) sensory contact, (7) sensation, (8) craving, (9) grasping, (10) rebirth process, (11) actual birth, (12) aging and death. It is through deliberate reversal of these twelve links that one can succeed in bringing the whole cycle to an end.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • n.­495
  • g.­110
  • g.­153
  • g.­412
g.­479

ultimately real

Wylie:
  • yongs su grub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་གྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pariniṣpanna AD

The direct perception of the nature of the mind and its objects. An alternative translation is “the absolute.” One of the three natures that are a central philosophy of the Yogācāra tradition.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­20
g.­480

Umādevī

Wylie:
  • lha mo u ma
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ་ཨུ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • umādevī AD

A goddess.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­100
g.­481

Unobstructed Appearance of the Light of a Lion’s Ornament

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i tog gi ’od zer snang ba thogs pa med pa
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་ཏོག་གི་འོད་ཟེར་སྣང་བ་ཐོགས་པ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A bodhisattva.

Yongle and Peking: seng ge’i tog ’od zer snang ba thogs pa med pa.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­54
  • 6.­129
g.­482

upādhyāya

Wylie:
  • mkhan po
Tibetan:
  • མཁན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upādhyāya AD

In India, a person’s particular preceptor within the monastic tradition, guiding that person for the taking of full vows and the maintenance of conduct and practice. The Tibetan translation mkhan po has also come to mean “a learned scholar,” the equivalent of a paṇḍita, but that is not the intended meaning in the sūtras.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­8
g.­483

Upananda

Wylie:
  • nye dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upananda AD

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of eight mythological nāga kings. The story of the two nāga kings Upananda and Nanda and their taming by the Buddha and Maudgalyāyana is told in the Vinayavibhaṅga (Toh 3, Degé vol. 6, ’dul ba, ja, F.221.a–224.a).

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­49
g.­484

upāsaka

Wylie:
  • dge bsnyen
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བསྙེན།
Sanskrit:
  • upāsaka AS

A man who has taken the layperson’s vows.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­85
  • 11.­12-13
  • 12.­7-8
  • 12.­20
  • 12.­29-30
  • 12.­54
  • 12.­59
  • 12.­67-69
  • 15.­21
  • 18.­6
g.­485

upāsikā

Wylie:
  • dge bsnyen ma
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བསྙེན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • upāsikā AS

A woman who has taken the layperson’s vows.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­85
  • 11.­12-13
  • 12.­7-8
  • 12.­20
  • 12.­29-30
  • 12.­54
  • 12.­59
  • 12.­67-69
  • 15.­21
  • 18.­6
g.­486

ūrṇā

Wylie:
  • mdzod spu
Tibetan:
  • མཛོད་སྤུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ūrṇā AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the thirty-two marks of a great being. It consists of a soft, long, fine, coiled white hair between the eyebrows capable of emitting an intense bright light. Literally, the Sanskrit ūrṇā means “wool hair,” and kośa means “treasure.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­7
  • n.­544
g.­487

Uruvilva­kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ltang rgyas ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ལྟང་རྒྱས་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • uruvilva­kāśyapa AD

The brother of Gayākāśyapa and Nadīkāśyapa. A practitioner of fire offering at Uruvilva (Bodhgayā), he and his five hundred pupils were converted to becoming bhikṣus of the Buddha. He and his brothers and their students were the third group to become followers of the Buddha after his enlightenment.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­167
  • g.­300
g.­488

Vairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang mdzad
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • vairocana

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­10
g.­489

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa AD

As one of the Four Mahārājas he is the lord of the northern region of the world and the northern continent, though in early Buddhism he is the lord of the far north of India and beyond. Also known as Kubera, he is the lord of the yakṣas and a lord of wealth.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 11.­1
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­22
  • 12.­70
  • 12.­73
  • 12.­75-76
  • 12.­79
  • 12.­82
  • 12.­85
  • 12.­87-88
  • 12.­98
  • 14.­17
  • 17.­1
  • 22.­35
  • n.­251
  • n.­253
  • n.­259
  • n.­261
  • g.­17
  • g.­222
  • g.­345
g.­490

vaiśya

Wylie:
  • rje’u rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྗེའུ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśya AD

The third of the four classes in the Indian caste system. It generally includes merchants and farmers.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­111
g.­491

Vajra Guard

Wylie:
  • rdo rje skyong
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Licchavī youth.

(Toh 555: rdo rje skyabs)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­5
g.­492

Vajra­guhyakādhipati

Wylie:
  • rdo rje gsang bdag
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་གསང་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • vajra­guhyakādhipati AD

One of the names of Kubera, the god of wealth, meaning “Lightning Lord of the Guhyakas,” or “treasure guardian.” In the tantra tradition, Guhyapati, “Lord of Secrets,” became a title of Vajrapāṇi.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­102
g.­493

Vajrapāṇi

Wylie:
  • lag na rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • ལག་ན་རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapāṇi AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Vajrapāṇi means “Wielder of the Vajra.” In the Pali canon, he appears as a yakṣa guardian in the retinue of the Buddha. In the Mahāyāna scriptures he is a bodhisattva and one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha.” In the tantras, he is also regarded as an important Buddhist deity and instrumental in the transmission of tantric scriptures.

In this text:

(Toh 555: rdo rje’i thal mo)

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­75
  • 1.­4
  • 8.­34
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­52
  • 14.­8-9
  • 22.­26
  • 22.­41
  • n.­286
  • g.­277
  • g.­492
g.­494

Vajraprākāra

Wylie:
  • rdo rje’i ’byung gnas
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེའི་འབྱུང་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • vajraprākāra AS

A mountain.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­7
g.­495

valerian

Wylie:
  • rgya spos
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་སྤོས།
Sanskrit:
  • tagara AS

Valeriana wallichii. Specifically, Indian valerian, also known as tagara and tagar.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­73
  • 15.­6
  • g.­422
g.­496

Vāli

Wylie:
  • ’khri byed
Tibetan:
  • འཁྲི་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vāli| AS

A yakṣa king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­46
g.­497

Varāṅga

Wylie:
  • yan lag mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • varāṅga AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­498

Varaprabha

Wylie:
  • ’od mchog
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • varaprabha AS

A buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­69
  • 8.­12
g.­499

Varṣādhipati

Wylie:
  • char pa’i bdag po
Tibetan:
  • ཆར་པའི་བདག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • varṣādhipati AS

A yakṣa king. The name means “Lord of Rain.”

(Toh 555: char pa’i dbang po)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­44
g.­500

Varuṇa

Wylie:
  • chu lha
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa AS

The name of the deity of water. In the Vedas, Varuṇa is an important deity and in particular the deity of the sky, but in later Indian tradition he is the god of only the water and the underworld. The Tibetan does not attempt to translate his name but instead has “god of water.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­34
  • 22.­37
  • g.­526
g.­501

Vāṣpa

Wylie:
  • rlangs pa
Tibetan:
  • རླངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vāṣpa AD
  • bāṣpa AO

He was one of the five companions of Śākyamuni in asceticism and later one of his first five pupils, attaining the state of a stream entrant.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­502

Vasu

Wylie:
  • ba su
Tibetan:
  • བ་སུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vasu AS

The name of a goddess, identified as the sister of Mahādeva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­68
g.­503

Vāsuki

Wylie:
  • nor rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • vāsuki AS

A nāga king, well known in Indian mythology as being the serpent coiled around Meru that was used to churn the ocean at the origin of the world.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­125
g.­504

Vāyu

Wylie:
  • rlung
Tibetan:
  • རླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vāyu AS

The god of the air and the winds.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 22.­37
  • g.­526
g.­505

Vemacitra

Wylie:
  • thags zangs
Tibetan:
  • ཐགས་ཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vemacitra AS

The king of the asuras. Also translated as bzang ris.

Degé Toh 556, Peking, Narthang and Lhasa: thag bzangs. Degé Toh 557: thag bzangs.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­51
g.­506

Venerable

Wylie:
  • tshe dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚེ་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āyuṣmat AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A respectful form of address between monks, and also between lay companions of equal standing. It literally means “one who has a [long] life.”

Located in 82 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­27-28
  • 5.­42-43
  • 5.­55-56
  • 10.­21
  • 10.­23
  • 11.­1-13
  • 12.­8-9
  • 12.­12-14
  • 12.­22
  • 12.­30-32
  • 12.­52-62
  • 12.­65
  • 12.­123
  • 13.­2-4
  • 13.­6
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­16
  • 14.­19
  • 14.­23
  • 15.­1
  • 16.­1
  • 18.­1-2
  • 18.­5
  • 18.­7-12
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­4-8
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­6
  • 23.­13
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­11-12
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­20-21
  • n.­211
g.­507

vetāla

Wylie:
  • ro langs
Tibetan:
  • རོ་ལངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vetāla AS

A class of beings that typically haunt charnel grounds and enter into and animate corpses. Hence, the Tibetan translation means “risen corpse.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­3
  • 15.­21
g.­508

vetiver

Wylie:
  • u shi ra
Tibetan:
  • ཨུ་ཤི་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • uśīra AS

Andropogon muricatus, Andropogon zizanioides. A type of grass.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­7
g.­509

Vibhūṣita

Wylie:
  • shin tu brgyan
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་བརྒྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • vibhūṣita AD

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­510

vidyāmantra

Wylie:
  • rig sngags
  • rig pa’i gsang sngags
Tibetan:
  • རིག་སྔགས།
  • རིག་པའི་གསང་སྔགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyāmantra AS

A type of incantation or spell used to accomplish a ritual goal. This can be associated with either ordinary attainments or those whose goal is awakening.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­16
  • 17.­3
  • 17.­27
  • 19.­12
  • n.­346
g.­511

Vidyutprabha

Wylie:
  • glog ’od
Tibetan:
  • གློག་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyutprabha AD

A nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­20
g.­512

Vimalaprabhā

Wylie:
  • dri ma med pa’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་མེད་པའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalaprabhā AD

The future realm where five hundred thousand bhikṣus in the Buddha’s saṅgha will become buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­44
  • g.­235
g.­513

vinaya

Wylie:
  • ’dul ba
Tibetan:
  • འདུལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vinaya

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­8
  • g.­117
g.­514

Vindhya

Wylie:
  • bin dhu
Tibetan:
  • བིན་དྷུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vindhya AD

A series of mountain ranges that extend across central India. The usual translation is bigs byed.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­66
g.­515

Virajadhvajā

Wylie:
  • rdul med pa’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་མེད་པའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • virajadhvajā AS

A world realm in the distant future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 23.­3
g.­516

Virtue of Light

Wylie:
  • ’od dge
Tibetan:
  • འོད་དགེ
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­517

Virūḍhaka

Wylie:
  • ’phags skyes po
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་སྐྱེས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • virūḍhaka AS

One of the Four Mahārājas, he is the guardian of the southern direction and the lord of the kumbhāṇḍas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­1
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­22
  • 14.­17
g.­518

Virūpākṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi bzang
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • virūpākṣa AS

One of the Four Mahārājas, he is the guardian of the western direction and the lord of the nāgas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­1
  • 12.­8
  • 12.­22
  • 14.­17
g.­519

Viśālaśrī

Wylie:
  • yangs pa’i dpal
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པའི་དཔལ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśālaśrī AS

A buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­11
g.­520

Viṣṇu

Wylie:
  • ’jug sel
Tibetan:
  • འཇུག་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • viṣṇu AD

One of the primary gods of the Brahmanical tradition, he is associated with the preservation and continuance of the universe.

(Toh 555: khyab ’jug)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­102
  • 22.­37
  • g.­52
  • g.­307
g.­521

Vulture Peak

Wylie:
  • bya rgod kyi phung po’i ri
  • bya rgod phung po
Tibetan:
  • བྱ་རྒོད་ཀྱི་ཕུང་པོའི་རི།
  • བྱ་རྒོད་ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gṛdhrakūṭa AS
  • gṛdhra­kūṭa­parvata AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gṛdhra­kūṭa, literally Vulture Peak, was a hill located in the kingdom of Magadha, in the vicinity of the ancient city of Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir, in the state of Bihar, India), where the Buddha bestowed many sūtras, especially the Great Vehicle teachings, such as the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras. It continues to be a sacred pilgrimage site for Buddhists to this day.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­35-36
  • i.­43
  • 1.­1
  • 2.­26-27
  • 2.­31
  • 4.­3
  • g.­365
g.­522

Vyākaraṇa

Wylie:
  • lung ston pa
Tibetan:
  • ལུང་སྟོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vyākaraṇa AS

The brahmin master, interlocutor in The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light. See also n.­62.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­37
  • 2.­33
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­41
  • 2.­55
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­93
  • n.­62
  • n.­498
  • g.­232
g.­523

Waning Light

Wylie:
  • ’od nyams pa
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཉམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A god who is the king of lightning in the western direction.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­2
g.­524

white beryl

Wylie:
  • bai DUr+ya
Tibetan:
  • བཻ་ཌཱུརྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • veruli AS

Goshenite: pure beryl without the impurities that give it its various colors.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­7
  • 28.­10
  • n.­544
g.­525

white water lily

Wylie:
  • ku mu da
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་མུ་ད།
Sanskrit:
  • kumuda AS

Nymphaea pubescens. The night-blossoming water lily, sometimes referred to as a “night lotus.” It can be white, pink, or red.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­14
  • 28.­9
g.­526

world guardians

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten skyong ba
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་སྐྱོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • lokapāla AD

A set of deities, each guarding a certain direction. Most commonly these are Indra (Śakra) for the east, Agni for the southeast, Yama for the south, Sūrya or Nirṛti for the southwest, Varuṇa for the west, Vāyu (Pavana) for the northwest, Kubera for the north, and Soma (Candra), Iśāni, or Pṛthivī for the northeast.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­85
g.­527

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 99 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­81
  • i.­85
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­25
  • 1.­31
  • 2.­8
  • 5.­85
  • 10.­51-52
  • 11.­5
  • 12.­6-9
  • 12.­14
  • 12.­20
  • 12.­29
  • 12.­32-33
  • 12.­52-55
  • 12.­58
  • 12.­63
  • 12.­96
  • 12.­119
  • 12.­123
  • 15.­71
  • 15.­104
  • 15.­127
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­4
  • 19.­7
  • 19.­9
  • 19.­15-17
  • 21.­17
  • 22.­26
  • 22.­36
  • 22.­39-43
  • 22.­80
  • n.­39
  • n.­324
  • n.­456-457
  • g.­17
  • g.­21
  • g.­22
  • g.­31
  • g.­44
  • g.­63
  • g.­65
  • g.­88
  • g.­92
  • g.­95
  • g.­140
  • g.­162
  • g.­199
  • g.­221
  • g.­222
  • g.­227
  • g.­230
  • g.­246
  • g.­253
  • g.­255
  • g.­261
  • g.­262
  • g.­266
  • g.­272
  • g.­287
  • g.­288
  • g.­289
  • g.­290
  • g.­292
  • g.­302
  • g.­304
  • g.­309
  • g.­316
  • g.­323
  • g.­328
  • g.­337
  • g.­349
  • g.­363
  • g.­400
  • g.­409
  • g.­434
  • g.­450
  • g.­461
  • g.­489
  • g.­496
  • g.­499
  • g.­528
g.­528

yakṣiṇī

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin mo
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣiṇī AS

A female yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 22.­54
g.­529

Yama

Wylie:
  • gshin rje
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • yama AS

The lord of death.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­42
  • 4.­9
  • 11.­1
  • 12.­28
  • 15.­62
  • 16.­1
  • 18.­11
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­8
  • 22.­37
  • g.­526
g.­530

Yāma

Wylie:
  • ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma AD

The third highest of the six paradises in the desire realm. Its name means “Free of Conflict.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­20
  • 15.­123
g.­531

yojana

Wylie:
  • dpag tshad
Tibetan:
  • དཔག་ཚད།
Sanskrit:
  • yojana AS

The longest unit of distance in classical India. The lack of a uniform standard for the smaller units means that there is no precise equivalent, especially as its theoretical length tended to increase over time. Therefore, it can indicate a distance of between four and ten miles.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­72
  • 12.­28
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­8
  • 22.­12
  • 22.­62-63
  • g.­160
0
    You are downloading:

    The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (2)

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (2) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, gser ’od dam pa’i mdo, Toh 556). Translated by Peter Alan Roberts and team. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh556/UT22084-089-013-glossary.Copy
    84000. The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (2) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, gser ’od dam pa’i mdo, Toh 556). Translated by Peter Alan Roberts and team, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh556/UT22084-089-013-glossary.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (2) (Suvarṇa­prabhāsottama­sūtra, gser ’od dam pa’i mdo, Toh 556). (Peter Alan Roberts and team, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh556/UT22084-089-013-glossary.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Action tantras
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy